Home

RDR-HX520/HX525/HX720/HX722/ HX725/HX727/HX920/HX925

Contents

1.
2. A 2 vem s An eno FA 117 a HARNESS 5 ANGND 1 405 6 V2IN 12 s POWER FAN 2 171711 103 eno omor D www N bs 2 gt usua s 3 eno 4 4 Jeno s s emo s waway 7 s swsv s swsv E unswav 10 10 UNSWAV rr se
3. i RD 060 BOARD FR 240 BOARD FR 159 BOARD 2 2 s i n vec 1 1 1 067 RECW 1 ATIDATAO 4 RECCCR p RECCR IDE 00 015 m 103002 103101 ATIDATA15 REMOTE COMMANDER 1 i 0601 D 5 ES 10 RECIEVER L ND3001 5 3010 cout FLDSTB 1 ADRO ADR1 ADE A0 A4 35 4 3 6 9 STB sat 4 FLD ADR2 C80 081 1 48 44 5 DIN 5016 09 0602 yout TO FROM Y 7 AES YOUT 38 DVD rg 2 7 8 T X END ATIRESET 1 UNIT 5v I4 501 0603 BOUT 03002 GR12 42 SEE PAGE 3 4 8 BOUT ATIOMARO 64 IDE DREQ 21 L HDD ATIDIOW 4 IDE W 23 8 DATA P3 WS fm 31 a AET GOUT ATIDIOR 25 TO FR
4. AV 103 BOARD 5 8 Br rs A IT CONTROLLER EET TE 20455943 REF NO SERIES 3 4 95552 m al 8674 Md W 10k 1 48675 CN602 15P Von JL668 Toc MARK REC PB R1627 8677 0 gt W 2 aa B 8 R678 gt BRB MODE A 4 ceno 1 12 Cannot measured 825 047 047 7 M 4 B 28602 8 R672 21671 57 57 0544 19 15 2 Ns 172 sires des s scs 8606 0616 zzo 47 sv 2SB1197K T 146 R JL611 DATA 674 oe FR6V SWITCH 52829 R68 8 LED DT CN3003 50 ays ek cal Sar Sle E Bas S ES 58 2 5 196
5. JL801 0 SDA We TO 4 8 AV 103 BOARD 7 8 41802 EURO 2 gt gt gt 89 rog SERIES 6 8 C802 12801 10 50 Tes IC801 R REC MODE 5 2 MODE 5V REG 75 2 970 B Bs ata 0835 R858 382 585 82 2 75 gt EURO INT ERI 85 B 85 0 5 8 0803 10u 50V 0830 B R871 100 0 FB801 D818 1 C m H e _ R872 D802 0 STZ6 8N T146 2 d He D803 STZ6 8N T146 1 3 uH DGND1 r C855 DGND2 w u 18 UDZSTE 176 2B Y Y 805 0815 C856 X UDZSTE 1713B 100 v on meet FB806 507 d care 9 FS AUX gt gt n u 2 8 0804 dun CR R c B act CVBS Y_0UT_to_AUX NNCD3 9F T1 gt 2085 AGND2 0807 0805 9 0 T EURO VIDEO IN OUT B 16V 8865 FB807 NNCD3 9F 11 1 3 63 138 C
6. TO FROM FR 240 BOARD CN3003 SEE PAGE 3 6 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 3 3 RD 060 BLOCK DIAGRAM Pos S Z lo
7. R342 R344 R362 p 4 7k 100 520 725 727 920 925 0 5 2200 4 7 HX520 AEP1 2 UK HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 AEP1 UK HX727 AEP1 AOUTR w o R311 c313 L R323 5600 8100 so 8200 AOUTR W R314 C316 R317 5600 C310 C314 47 20 5 150 2200 180p R326 e XM ox o 4 4 4 8 1 0310 3 2 1 2502704 146 0 238 MUTE LINE OUT R330 3 72 m lt R342 R344 W AUOUTR gt cao 8301 220 2 E R362 3 8 0326 8 R353 220 470 R340 w gt AUOUTL 0320 R331 72 2509 FB302 47k 2 gt W e Wwe B R343 T0 2 8 SWAI2V lt lt 5 08 0 0309 100k SWA 8V 2502704 146 22 DA L 13713 MUTE 7 8 SPD_GND gt 22 DA R SPDIFO C311 0315 R327 150 180 470 eJ 46 R315 C317 80050002 2200 au 42100 0 5 25V AOUTL W R313 c312 L gt gt AUGND 2 8215 gt TO 2 8 6 8 7 8 0 5 AOUTL Wr 8321 R318 8320 2200 5600 SWASV lt B UNSW6V A gt R366 1k 5V REG AW B 11 9 11 9 t 5305155 j 50601 85 1 UNSW12V A gt gt 2 46 50 OUT 12 C306 gt gadi DIGITAL OUT D301 0305 0307 0311 a 1 EH 1 R307 220 BAS16 03W CONTROL 0
8. 8124 8128 R1068 RD 060 BOARD 1 7 att PM ET 58 R1066 3708 w xsvensr gt 6 R127 8 470 ELA A RISM3 5 kg gt 5 1060 1030 oiu B REF NO SERIES Em S NC gt au TMS TRST NC SCL uj 1552259 MARK REC PB MODE TE S ves soa 5 W 4 4e eni 5525255 ene 9998 SEEEECEEEEEE 10108 R REC MODE R1041 5 ogu gadag 25588 2555 MODE 47 5 5555655 cus 9999 273 I lt 522222 HADRS 6 B m n IC108 t T E 8 BID TIE EH EEA Eu L messurement of m IC102 PT sht Dx 2 the 5 1 and HADRS CNET NC 05 the Transistors with HADRS 14 EEPROM 211024 x gt GND ne mark is not possibli HADRS 18 ind 88588388 IG105 DDR HADRS 16 BREE S5555535 HIC 2 HYSDU1216220TP JDR HADRS 17 ewig H 3393333335 Son A HADRS HO 14 meg B 9 na vss 2 1006 01038 01028 HADRS 20 RY RY RY SY RYRY S YS Ys RY SY RY RY RYBY ST BY SY BY BY EY BY RY BY BY EY EV EYE 2100 m 102 1 HADRS 21 AAAA ASAA ESS S 2 BE
9. i Y C Y G CR R CB B TUSCLTUSDA 18432MHz ERN ETE E E l i RECVY RECCCR IDE 00 015 EE DVD FL 1 59 i IC803 ADE A0 A4 UNIT i VIDEO 7 5 Y C Y G CRIR CB B 1 SELECTOR CYIGCRIR a iBOARD 1 2 43001 4 AT2 DATA 0 15 LINE 2 IN i 1 SPDIFO 2 1 c2 S VIDEO 62 1 12 HDD DRIVE 1 7 lj 16302 16302 i DALDAR 1 AOUT L AUT AODATAI i lj TOW E 1C803 AUDIO 12 1 AIN L R Hi 22 DADRS 0 12 1C105 106 i TULTUR l i 00000 i 1 gt MUTING O i m 12802 i i AUDIO s 1 SELECTOR DAL DAR 1 202 203 uNswav 606 i RESET IC103 i i RISM3 i o9 CN802 9 86140 AXIO LINE1 TV VY OUT RISMSTATUS2 HDATA D18 679 AVLINK i AND GATE IC501 5 MRI i FLASH MEMORY 128Mbit i L1 R1 OUT i i i AND GATE 9 5 RGB i i IC502 SUPER AND CN801 5 4 i OUT P 128Mbit LINES DECODE 9
10. sjueunsn py pue sumag A Corre Channel Receivable Select On to turn on AFT This recorder can scan the CATV channels sponding Set Frequency to Q and the frequency channels 521 channel number range MHz gn am m to S41 On the Channel Set menu the S25 S28 33125 339 25 channels indicated as 51 to 544 For Normally select this are indicated as S1 to S4 E example channel is indicated Channel S26 S29 339 25 347 25 Off Allows you to adjust the Set number 1 and channel Q is indicated S27 S30 347 25 355 25 pictures manually Channel Set number S23 see the table below the channel you want to S28 531 355 25 363 25 the Auto Fine Tuning function does not preset is indicated by its frequency for 829 832 363 25 371 25 work effectively select Off and press w example 152 75 MHz refer to the table 4 S30 533 371 25 379 25 Press 4 4 to obtain a clearer picture and below to find the corresponding channel press number 531 534 379 25 387 I Corre Channel Receivable 532 535 387 25 395 25 Receivable channels sponding Set Frequency 833 836 395 25 403 25 number range MHz TV system Channel coverage S34 S37 403 25 411 25 12 BG West European 2 E12 VHF B 5 11845212445 835 838 41125 41925 Countries except c 82
11. 16 A TU401 _ TUNER AV 103 BOARD 4 8 AERIAL P o A OUT E 3 TUNER 8 208 a gt o m o 5 lt Z lt gt n 1 6 17 30V REG IC401 1401 ios TK11819MTL 0 1401 1 46 EIN B me sese z 8475 GND R420 100 Ru 8 323 B 0 4 4 V OUT 1402 1404 5 em TTL 401 407 410 47u 1k 10u 10u 25 50V 50V 50V sov Fook 8 1 0453 0 001u BS 58 5 4 414 47u 46 L405 25 01401 BAS16 03W 10uH 0456 A 19 oH 0 001u 0405 Rae Wal BC847CE6327 caps TU G MAX A 8415 27k D 2 0 1 B4 B AFT 8414 AUTO m TU AUTOP a 100k n PRESET a R422 5 om TU MAX 01408 ine TU PCONT 2 3j TU AUTOP mum w BT 5 2 E TU SCL e E TO 5 8 6 8 7 8 TU_SDA e TUL TO 7 8 TUR 01402 20 MSD6O1 RSTI p gt C1409 C1410 1411 1412 R1410 10u 33u 01 2200 50 50V 01401 MSB709 RT1 SIFAMP 0146 1406 25V B G 8 51417 B 8 23 411406 u 6403 sci our L S 50V 2 3 4407 I 5V REG rm TESTN EURO MSP Sci our R 8 e 1404 18 432MHz 22 UNSWGV T gt E 2n H
12. 2 13 R3005 54 2200 id R3003 0 gt 0 E 93004 44 Bc857CE6327 kV 4700 50 SWITCH 5 LED DRIVER 54 03001 R3008 BCR133E6327 0 65601 SWITCH 0 01 16 103001 BU2050F E2 413001 HDD JL3010 51 03002 03004 SLR 332VRT32 R3006 EB3804X TP J555K JL3002 LECK DVD 54 220 5 R3009 JL3003 FLSTB 5 lt lt 5 1 HDD HDD JL3004 LEDT 3 54 LERST JL3005 JL3013 51 LESTB R3007 e 5 220 3005 213006 B 113014 51 LECK AM SLI 343YCT32WST lt m x R3010 JL3007 JL3015 0 LEDT 150 8 7 03003 DVD JL3008 23002 SLR 332VRT32 e 1 TIMER REC 16V JL3029 JL3030 B 4 415081 LEDIM JL3032 413033 N JL3034 JL3035 lt LEDT JL3036 LERST JL3037 e LECK JL3038 LESTB JL3039 FLSTB JL3040 JL3041 413042 413043 R3001 0 2012 DV IN N3005 CN3004 4P JL3022 TO RD 060 53006 BOARD 6 7 CN701 OPEN CLOSE 4 36 3007 98018 53012 83001 R3013 2200 5 DVD o o e 0 5 PLAY R3019 R3023 3014 83008 2200 53013 2200 53002 2200
13. If a message appears and indicates that the disc s control information is full erase or edit unnecessary titles gt When editing a DVD R or DVD R finish editing before finalising the disc You cannot edit a finalised disc HDD EU Edit features ES In Original Playlist Original Playlist title title title title ET Erase page 64 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Protect page 64 Yes Yes Yes No Yes Title Name page 64 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A B Erase page 65 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Erase Titles page 65 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Divide page 66 Yes Yes No Yes No Set Thumbnail page 64 Yes Yes Yes Yes No Chapter mark page 67 Yes Yes Yes No Create a Playlist page 67 Yes No Yes No No Make a Playlist page 69 Yes No Yes No No Change Order page 69 No No Yes No Combine page 70 No Yes No Yes No DVD RW only pue Burse13 gt 63 64 open up disc space To open up disc space ona DVD RW or DVD RW Video mode erase the title with the largest number in the title list Largest title number For the HDD DVD RWs VR mode you can erase any title For DVD Rs and DVD Rs the available disc does not increase even if you erase titles See Erasing and Editing a Title on page 64 or Erasing multiple titles Erase Titles on page 65 To switch between the Playlist and Title List You can display the P
14. Power supply block AV 103 board Page 2 6 Page 2 5 2 1 NOTE Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given 2 1 CASE BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2 Three tapping screws 3x 8 3 Case block assembly Two tapping screws 2 2 TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY The stiff wire Tray cover assembly Open the tray 2 2 2 3 PANEL SECTION Four claws Three claws Front panel section 2 4 FR 240 BOARD FL 159 BOARD Connector CN3101 FL 159 board Three tapping screws GBV 3x 8 Flexible flat cable FAR 004 CN3003 Connector CN3005 Flexible flat cable FL cover FLR 007 Three tapping screws BV 3x 8 9 6 240 board 2 5 Tapping screw BV 3 x 8 Four screws HDD damper screw Four tapping screws 09 Lead 6 3UNCX5 PH077 Two dampers e 9 Connector Harness 49 HDD bracket 6 Two dampers gt 2 6 DVD DRIVE Four tapping screws BV 3x 8 2 Remove the DVD section in the direction of the arrow The wire pin that holds the harness is set up Two Non HALOGENE tapes Flexible flat cable FRD 010 1 9 DVD drive Harness PD 138 Flexible flat cable FRD 010 CN101 gt 7
15. 1 6 1 Inserting Disca es Ses sds a a aw Sia uu 1 6 Recording a Programme S A 1 6 3 Playing Recorded Programme Title List 1 7 4 Displaying the Playing Remaining Time and Play Information 1 7 5 Changing Name of Recorded Programme 6 Labelling and Protecting a 1 8 7 Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment Finalise 1 9 8 Reformatting 1 9 Timer Recording scale 1 10 Before Recording 1 10 Timer Recording Standard Show View 1 10 Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings Timer List nee ene nennen 1 11 Recording From Connected Equipment 1 12 Playback e 1 13 1 13 Searching for Title Chapter Track etc eem 1 14 Playing MP3 Audio Tracks JPEG nako Files or r DivX Video Files lt lt III 1 14 Erasing and Editing oT PN 1 15 Before Editing mM 1 15 Erasing and Editing a Title e 1 16 Creating and Editing a Playlist m 1 16 Dubbing HDD lt DVD nee e nnne nn 1 17 Before Dubbing Seria eO Mo ade qe aieo EE LEN de Eee a 1 17 Dubbing DV Dubbing Before DV 1 19 Recording an Entire DV Format Tape One Touch Dubbing
16. 103 FL 159 FR 240 Ref No Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks R1736 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 IC R1738 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R1801 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 103101 8 759 643 83 uPD16315GB 3BS THERMISTOR JACK TH601 1 803 384 11 THERMISTOR 1608 J3101 1 780 049 11 TERMINAL BOARD S TERMINAL 3P TUNER UNIT COIL ATU401 gt 8 597 558 00 TUNER FSS 00441 L3101 1 412 537 31 INDUCTOR 100uH EXCEPT HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 A TU401 8 597 559 00 TUNER FSS BTF DF441 lt FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE gt HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 ND3101 1 519 849 21 INDICATOR TUBE FLUORESCENT lt VIBRATOR gt lt TRANSISTOR gt X602 1 813 700 21 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 10MHz X603 1 813 698 11 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 32 76KHz 03101 8 729 901 88 TRANSISTOR 2SC2411K CR X1101 1 781 589 21 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 16MHz 03102 8 729 901 88 TRANSISTOR 2562411 525 725 727 925 X1401 1 813 713 31 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 18 432MHZ lt RESISTOR gt kwa ww R3101 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP 75 5 1 10 Not supplied 159 BOARD COMPLETE R3102 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP 75 5 1 10 R3103 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R3104 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 lt CAPACITOR gt R3105 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 63103 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220 5 50V R3108 1 218 285 11 METAL CHI
17. 3 no 5 58 5 EL EL 2 5 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 5 8 x DADRI 8 4 m 88 5 Mie 88 DADR 7 5 4 paci 5 28 DADR O 5 S nun 4 Pee BRRBRBS DADR 1 5 at 5 DADRI6 DADR 5 unswav 3 22 Ride DADRI2 x x 8 68 5 DADR 4 swiv FETUS 8 S 8 OUH H We i 8 voo vss 2 gt 4 D d gs cur unswav F ES j 3 on 7 R1051 1034 cor C1036 9110 C127 C125 556 je ed d as am your Tw a 1 106 se 512Mbit DDR we pou FSEL REC656I 1 nEcesel 1 ND 2 R138 768 548 6561 2 L 1026 E recesei2 aM E ALACKO RECGSGI S receseia mepe 4 MWe mido ADATAO RECGSGI 4 Age 47 AOLRCKI A reces6i 4 IDE pe 5 RB106 RECGSOI S 32 100 68 47k T Kw C a scesell5 iE 09 6 mido RECGSGI S 2530 A0DATAI reecese1 6 877 IDE ps 7 AT2CS 1 6561 7 gst AT2CS 0 lt recesei 7 AN 2 io 656 AK AT2ADR O m E x 05 04 19 em REC656H 10 48 recese
18. Video Language Aude Format DVDRW Recording One Touch Dubbing Easy Setup Parental Control DVD VIDEO only Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be limited according to a predetermined level such as the age of the users Scenes may be blocked or replaced with different scenes 1 Select Parental Control in DVD and press ENTER If you have not entered a password the display for registering a new password appears DVD Parantal Control Enter a new password Recording Settings Recording The Recording setup allows you to adjust recording settings 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select SETUP and press ENTER 3 Select Recording and press ENTER The Recording setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined d HD Rae Video DVD Rec Aude TmerSetngs Recording TV Direct Rec OR 3 ovo Synehro Rec Record te 8 Others Chapter On Easy HDD Settings Bilingual Recording Selects the sound to be recorded on the HDD Main Records the main sound for the bilingual programme Sub Records the sub sound for the bilingual programme Main Sub Records the main and sub sounds for the bi
19. m Total duration of the selected scene 2 Total number of scenes 3 Selected scene 10 Select the scene you want to re edit and press ENTER The sub menu appears Move Changes the scene order using lt gt and press ENTER Erase Erases the scene When asked for confirmation select OK To add more scenes press go to step 5 add more scenes from another title select Select and go to step 4 To preview all of the captured scenes in the listed order select Preview 11 When you finish editing the scene list select OK and press ENTER The title of the created Playlist is added to the Title List Playlist The title name is the title name of the first scene X Hint After titles are combined the title name is the title name of the first title prior to combination Note When the number of chapters in the title to be combined exceeds the limit the chapters at the end are combined into a single chapter Dividing a Playlist title Divide HDD You can divide a Playlist title For operations see page 66 1 17 6 Hint When a Playlist title is created the IN and OUT points will become chapter marks and each scene will become a chapter Note The picture may pause when the edited scene is played To add the entire title to the Playlist title as one scene Make a Playlist 1 Pres
20. AT2DIOW HDIOWN RSTN 2 9 34 4 pes 2 2 3 AT2DMARQ HDMARO 5 i 0835 IC803 AUDIO ADC DAC Ed 10701 1 AN 403 2 asss AN 218 ae PHYDI0 0 7 2 AOBCKI 9 AOBCKI PHYDIO7 Ly 4 AINR 2 AOLRCKI 5 AOLRCKI BIER CS PHYSCLK gt m u eno 0 CN701 Q MUm PHYCTL 1 Cd 1 X701 AOUTR ALRCKO Cu PHYLPS 27 576MHz 9 LRCKO PHYLPS 69 LPS eM 793 RISI PHYLREO CUT PHYLREG RESET 49 AQUTL Hi SCLKI1 TIS ACLKI 1 821 TX Z68FSCHG__ c DACMC CHE 384 548 T ADCMC DACBCK 0 49 DDATAO DDATA 0 31 DDATA31 DADRSO DADRSI0 121 TO FROM a 6 SPDIFO DADRS12 E 103 BOARD SEE PAGE 3 4 i DBA 0 1 DBAO DBAT AE21 AD20 IC604 Lt 00080 f vos up 000810 31 AND GATE 00083 10105 10106 11 80015 Did f U24U21 DDMIO 3 256Mbit DOR STATUS 721 023 IT RE05 2457 2457 RISMSTATUS1 _ RISM RTSO C3 8404143 8104143 IT XRST5 54 56 57 59 54 56 57 59 IT SIN5 meo 5207 0150 60 62 63 65 0015 60 62 63 65 0015 1 IT SCLKS 7 RTSIO XH RISO axial 26 e 150082 12606 DCL
21. Output of fan direction speed switching signal speed 5 1 P_FAIL Function Input of UNSW6V power off detection signal HDET 1 Detection of IN SEL output video signal CE Fixed at when the flash is overwritten is VCC HDET 2 Not used INSEL PCONT Output of power supply signal H INSEL XP AMUTE Output of muting signal for audio SLICE V SW Not used SYNCHRO_DET Detection of selection signal from component video signal Fixed at L 1 Fixed at H XP_VMUTE Output of muting signal for video INSEL_3 Not used INSEL1 Not used INSEL2 Not used INSEL6 Not used EEP_SDA Output of IIC data signal with EEPROM EEP_SCL Output of IIC clock signal with EEPROM XEEP_WP O O O O Output of IIC writing protect signal with EEPROM VCC2 Power supply input Digital 5V INSEL4 Not used VSS Digital GND INSELS Not used BS_BIT_SW Output of busy signal for IR control IC BS_BST_CONT Output of INT signal for IR control IC BS_COR_DET Not used BS_CONV_CONT Not used BS_DEC_SW Output of reset signal for IR control IC BS_PCONT Not used BS_VOL_DET Not used SYNC V I Input of vertical synchronous
22. Frish To erase a character move the cursor to the right of the character at the input row Select Back and press ENTER To insert a character move the cursor to the right of the point where you want to insert the character Select the character and press ENTER To erase all of the characters select Clear All and press ENTER 7 Select Finish and press ENTER To cancel the setting select Cancel 1 8 Example When playing a CD Track playing time and the current track index number Remaining time of the current track Playing time of the disc Remaining time of the disc CD text when available Example When playing an MP3 audio track Playing time and number of the current track Current album number Example When viewing a JPEG image Current file number and total number of files in the current album Current album number and total number of albums Example When playing a DivX video file Current file number and playing time of the current file Current album number Notes The recorder can only display the first level of a CD s text such as the disc name The letters or symbols that cannot be displayed are replaced with Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be displayed correctly To use the number buttons You can also use the number buttons to enter characters Refer to the number next to each row of letters on your TV screen
23. BERE 5 vsa Lac 10 HSS PHYLPS W2 Ue i 0005110 e NAND 08 0 are m PHYDI00 07 b PHYDIOLT 2 We DOT Rint ems 0005 5 en Wie OX CS PORE RP Ow 5 EL Nen e ape 5 PHYDIOIS Wet sre mili 280 VOD PHYDIOG 1017 DATATI r1 pra il Hea 12 VDD33 PHYDIOZ Ta or ums RISMSTATUS1 873 1 E EN d Ra A768F5441K RB124 WE 5 i S 2 38 5 lt LIONE SESE ES EE EPER EE EEEE T 58 62 28 vss 2 Eum 8 me 3 Da KEKRER SERA RERR RR SC Ec ROOTS IAS ms 5 5 555 558855 EEEE MEN Um pest 5 wc 5 w 4 er uns Gee eee eee eee ee lt 520520000228225 9814550009000000009000909 202220 1 109 9 6 a D N D a SYSYsYsYzYzYs A AGA TYS9YSYSYzYzyY Bl 8 amp 8 ELElE S3VREG DBA1I 0 d DADR 11 s 8 z IC101 gs lt lt DADR S 58 8 88
24. VREF1 9 1 8 NA H GND T gt 28 H XTAL_0UT 8 g 5 pacm_t 8 af D_CTR_VO1 _ 8 88 58 D_CTR_1 0_00 vREF2 8 ADR_SEL ne 3 R1451 81454 ak Sk sTANDBYO NC 160 0 5 ane 1403 AN AN MSD601 RT1 ik C14 BUFFER 01453 111 tu 46 R411 o W 2 JL402 0 6 e Z5 T 12 13 1 06 07 08 09 00 01 02 0401 12 100 o o 80847056327 AM 3 51 3 616 03 JL403 T _ 5 411405 J 17 lt TU VIDEO lt lt e B 10uH 100 100 8405 R407 e 1k 1k ff 01401 01413 1415 00102 0 22 25V B B Note The components identified by mark or dotted TUNER 103 4 8 4 11 line with mark critical for safety Replace only with part number specified 4 12 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925
25. gt If the satellite tuner can output RGB If you want to use the Synchro Rec signals function This recorder accepts RGB signals If the This connection is necessary to use the satellite tuner can output RGB signals Synchro Recording function See connect the TV SCART connector on the Recording from connected equipment with a satellite tuner to the LINE 3 DECODER jack timer Synchro Rec on page 49 and set Line3 Input of Scart Setting to Set Line3 Input of Scart Setting in the Video RGB in the Video setup Video setup page 89 according to the page 89 Note that this connection and specifications of your satellite tuner See your setup disable the SMARTLINK function If satellite tuner s instructions for more you want to use the SMARTLINK function information with a compatible set top box see the If you are using a Sky tuner be sure to instructions supplied with the set top box connect the tuner s VCR SCART jack to the LINE 3 DECODER jack Then set Line3 Input of Scart Setting according to the specifications of the VCR SCART jack on your satellite tuner Notes Synchro Recording does not work with some tuners For details see the tuner s operating instructions If you disconnect the recorder s mains lead you will not be able to view the signals from the connected tuner 23 4 Select Scart Setting and press Connecting a PA
26. r RD 060 BOARD SRV 1858EK IC601 7 ______ 1V REG 1 1802 1601 SWITCHI
27. 14 TIMER LIST button 47 15 DISPLAY button 31 16 4 4 button 20 17 87 RETURN button 47 18 OPTIONS button 38 19 lt instant replay instant advance buttons 29 59 20 previous next buttons 1 HDD button 27 DVD button 27 2 1 0 on standby button 20 3 4 open close button 27 4 PROG programme buttons 27 The button has a tactile dot 5 Number buttons 44 58 The number 5 button has a tactile dot 6 INPUT SELECT button 51 77 7 AUDIO button 54 The AUDIO button has a tactile dot 8 SUBTITLE button 54 9 MENU button 52 Front panel display RTI 1 HDD DVD indicators Displays the selected media and the playing recording status 2 Dubbing direction indicator 3 SMARTLINK indicator 14 4j Displays the following Playing time remaining time Current title chapter track index number Recording time recording mode Displays DATA CDs as 6 Hint 54 21 411 1 1 Il gt search slow freeze frame buttons 54 22 gt play button 52 11 pause button 54 W stop button 52 The gt button has a tactile dot 23 TIME TEXT button 31 04 REC button
28. wr fis s6 vcour 812 5 8 5 J J PH 077 138 4114 HARNESS ele 53 B 825 15122118 812112 313814 4131 8 6122 8 2 elella 81812558 51515551 lt HARNESS 150 83111 818518 8 8 818 HEBBEBBRERBEBEBEBBHEBE 23 18 8858 818181 8818 1 290 ola 88818888 2 2 2 1615 215 s e ele 219 ris sie ET FRA 003 FRA 004 FRA 005 G 4818181 BTOB FFC 1 0mm FFC 1 0mm FFC 1 0mm 1 50 1 50 1 50 515 515 E 8 2 51215 3 7232 i 81 181 15 8 5858 5 al al 18 s 221285121515 2 2 2 2 2 4813 315528 52 88 E 585 5 1 i alala H uer 5 HBE GND 2 2 35 5 ren s 1 DE 4 4 IDE T 5 wm s 5 iot be s s iot o meos 7 7 we os FAR 004 s s ot ons IDE 04 9 9 IDE 04 FFC 1 0mm IDE 011 10 10 IDE 011 1 230 n 187171 DVD mon w DRIVE qo Eon ve wE ona wm vr mems fre v wo ors e eno J RD 060 OER e m did e me 23 GND 2 24 euo weg os eno Toe
29. 4 1605 HADRSI6 31 i HCSI0 o REAL TIME 10 CLOCK 13307 PHYD0 0 7 l 91 0 A768 FS441K i X603 I IC604 32 76kHz i rry P PRON 16 Es FR 240 BOARD 1 2 TE Li REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER 12603 10301 i sv AVENE IT CONTROL 1 i FUNCTION BUFFER ___ DECODER i I 1 li neues HDD DVD 1601 i SYNCHRO 1C3001 11 P FAIL DET i i r LED DRIVE id i i 24 576MHz Lel 4 I 4 41 t SW5V i 1 i gt UNSW4V gt gt UNSW3V i i ii jj 7 bM pem FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE AE SWITCHING REGULATOR i id a FR 159 BOARD 22 i SRV 1855EK 0101 m 1 18 240 BOARD 2 2 POWER ma UNSW12V UNSWIZV REGULATOR unswev mw UNSW NV uswa 1 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 1 i 2 HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 ee ee ee ee 3 1 3 2 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722
30. remote performs the following Buttons Operations TV Turns your TV on or 1 Adjusts the volume of your TV TV PROG Selects the programme position on your TV 2 Switches your TV s input source To operate the TV DVD button for SCART connections only The TV DVD button switches between the recorder and the last input source selected on the TV Point your remote at the recorder when using this button When you connect the recorder to the TV via the SCART jacks the input source for the TV is set to the recorder automatically when you start playback To watch another source press the TV DVD button to switch the TV s input source Step 4 Connecting the Mains Lead Connect the supplied mains lead to the AC IN terminal of the recorder Then plug the recorder and TV mains leads power cords into the mains After you connect the mains lead you must wait for a short while before operating the recorder You can operate the recorder once the front panel display lights up and the recorder enters standby mode Tf you connect additional equipment to this recorder page 21 be sure to connect the mains lead after all connections are complete to AC IN o gt to mains If you have Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD recorder If the supplied remote interferes with your other Sony DVD recorder or player set the command mode nu
31. When Auto Display is set to default in the Video setup page 90 information automatically appears on the screen when the recorder is operated Note Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be displayed correctly Checking the playing remaining time You can view the playing or time information displayed on the front panel display Press TIME TEXT repeatedly The displays differ depending on the disc type or playing status Example When playing a DVD Playing time and number of the current title b 15 Playing time number of the current chapter Remaining time of the current chapter Example When playing a VIDEO CD Playing time and number of the current scene or track Example Input Title Name Tile 0080 coman J The type of characters will change according to the language you select in Easy Setup Some languages allow you to enter an accent mark To enter a letter with an accent mark select an accent followed by the letter Example Select and then a to enter To insert a space select Space 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the remaining characters Input row Input eLILIEID 1184 ewm osea Cea cocer
32. g lt lt x lt lt lt HDATA 8 Tom Epp mme 72222228 HDATA S lt HDATA 9 lt 504 HDATAT11 HDATA 10 E B B HDATA 12 HDATA 11 ATA HDATA 13 HDATA 12 502 HDATAA HDATA 13 lt 16502 c 151 gt gt R535 5600 gt gt TRST R532 5600 HADRS 30 Ex S29GL256N90TFIR20 34 vio 9 R524 NC 5 32 31 gt cs 05101 20 D 516 e W A2 HADRS 28 nm irai vss rz 27 R546 HOE JL531 30 18 52 1271 VEN HDATA 15 RSS OE M 5 HADRS 26 1 9 501 HDATAT7 R553 W 000 HADRS 25 W R557 008 SCS HADRS 24 SUPER AND 128M bit HDATALIA N 16 16 gt R552 001 as HADRS 23 HDATAT13 R556 009 HADRS 13 IC501 4 HN29V128A0ABP 5E HDATA S REST Wy 002 A Z HADRS 12 HDATA 12 W FEBS Dao 3 HDATAR AN 003 03 0655 8560 pan 21 2 0 HADRS 9 R554 HDATA 11 0 02 gt lt 31532 HDATA 3 W 19 bare S 5 HADRS 10 HDATAD 095 HADRS 11 4 4S bars BE HADRS 22 096 LAC HADRS 21 HDATAS bara lt HADRS 20 01 007 A HADRS 19 DQ15 A 1 12 HADRS 18 vss 13 HADRS 17 34 21 HMS
33. 3300 0 56 T3101 D E we K eig DC DC CONVERTER 155355 17 42 1 0 0068 TRANSFORMER C3113 03115 L 2004 E 63114 58 B 22u Oni B 2 14 710 50V TF 50V T sov 3106 03108 2012 100 A 155355 17 16V 04 3 1 e 03109 JL3111 56 aD 155355 17 28 2411 1146 08 ey 3 8 3126 GRD10 R3115 t G EO 27k GRD11 T ASAS eh sta FL DRIVER GRD12 PT6315 163101 SEGIS SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 R3123 0 SEG11 SEG10 CN3101 10P 52 SW Y2 IN AN GND ol S o o o o a A 103 B 15549994492 BOARD 6 8 C3118 AN GND one 4 15 B AU GND L2 IN AU GND R2 IN B D3105 STZ6 8N T146 CN3102 BP 13160 FLSTB 6 STB LED 113162 IT GND FR 5V 53101 IT GND FL 6 4 21 R3113 220k 4 22 F2 52 TO FR 240 BOARD CN3001 PAGE 4 23 FL DRIVER LINE2 IN POWER SW FL 159 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 1 2 FR 240 BOARD DV REMOCON RECEIVER FUNCTION SW LED A NO MARK REC PB MODE CN3001 8P KEYO 11 1 C LED_CK FLD_STB FL 159 BOARD LED_DT CN3102 IT_GND PAGE 4 22 FR_5V IT_GND FL_POW_6V o N
34. 4 24 R1633 Xe 6 FLD_CLK io 0 5 35 53 5 amp LED STB 197 2 EIS 9 2 eose AWATA 5 5 5 5 lt 255 5 FLD_STB 12 FLD_STB C NS 474 12 0601 03 04 Oc 120113 Kevo 14 SWITCH KEY2 1681 15512485 0 S 115 2 a 558 ET PUREE HE 16 5 2385525385 553 d age ds s S 3 R1636 2 258 BRI 8 6 11P 100 gt 0 3 8 4 50 41637 _ DIAG 1 E dll oS RMTIN SIRCSIN E lt lt PCONT 1682 81637 D 2 JSTIN JUST CLK AVLINK IN 2 8 JL683 NISE RX FLD_DATA 01 TU 3 SOUTS FLD_DATA PI3 AUTO_PRESET_1 Sy 21601 163 5 LI SINS FLD IN P14 TU_PCONT ney 19 41639 EURO_INT VA_PCONT gt 5 804 REIS CLKS FLD CLK _INT3 NC 1 3e HECK k BYTE INTA SYNC 2 5 10k w 100k XIT_RST 6 so 210631 VSYNC TU_AUTOP CNVSS 7 CNVSS _INT5 SYNC_V_1 U P20 BS VOL DET je 118015 T 9 39 TU AFT 4 XCOUT P21 8S_PcoN 2 O TT SH TXD2 9 gt 51 4644 RESET5V TU P
35. 525 725 727 925 1636 1 216 809 11 METAL 4 7 5 1 10 R1637 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R1638 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 10K 596 1 10W HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 81707 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 10K 5 1 10W 1709 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R1710 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R1714 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R1715 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP R1716 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R1717 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R1719 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP R1720 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP R1735 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 8 9 AV 103 Remarks 0 HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 0 HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 1K 5 1 10W HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 0 4 7K 5 1 10W HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 150 5 1 10 525 725 727 925 1K 5 1 10W 1 5K 5 1 10W 1K 5 1 10W 100 5 1 10W 680 5 1 40W 100 5 1 10W 100 5 1 10 2 2 5 1 10 2 2 5 1 10W 120K 5 1 10W 2 2K 5 1 10W 0 0 0 1K 5 1 10W 100K 0 5 1A40W 270K 0 5 1 10 39K 0 5 1 10 10K 5 1 10W 10K 5 1 10W 10 5 1 10 10 5 1 10 150 5 1 10W 100 5 1 10 22 5 1 10W 10K 5 1 10W 33K 5 1 10 10 5 1 10 10 5 1 10 1K 5 1 10W 0 100K 5 1 10W 470 5 1 10W 470 590 1 10W 10 5 1 10 1K 5 1 10W 100 5 1 10W 100 5 1 10W 100 5 1 10W 0 0 0 470 5 1 10W 0 75 5 1 10W 75 5 1 10 10 5 1 10W 10 5 1 10 470 5 1 10
36. N AVLINK OUT Output of AV LINK signal N 561 1 Output of clock signal N TU SDA 1 I I I I O O Input output data signal 552 Analog GND 2 Output of filter signal 2 for Fsc N LP3 Output of filter signal 3 forVPS Output of filter signal 4 Q2 VDD2 Power supply input Analog 5V TESTI Fixed at L ON MI Fixed at L SLICEON Output of slicer operation detection SOUT Output of serial TXD 1 signal with system controller SIN Input of serial 1 signal with system IT_SCLK Output of serial CLK 1 signal with system controller MONITOR Input of RTS signal with system controller 15 TXD RXD pA STATUS3 Not used AB STATUSI O O O 101 101 0 Input of communication status 1 signal with system controller ON CLKOUT Digital GND Output of switch system power control signal FAN DET Input of fan stopping detect signal Output of fan on off signal on FAN_SPEED 0
37. NISE RX lt 5 5 P730 PS7 INSEL 3 9 VSYNC xi CLOCK GEN XP VMUTE vsyne G TA1OUT AVLINK 0UT TT 40 _ RIOT 4700 AN 10k 4 SCL2 TU_SCL 1 San ux P41 AREA1 18 X 2228 TT 16604 XP AMUTE 6 8 7 8 TU_SDA lt lt SDA2 TU_SDA_1 84 5 T P42 S 24CS04AFJ TB G XP_AMUTE gt 0 3 8 u 5 4 EESTE SETI 155 4 1654 4 28282555 000 1 628 14 5 a R620 B25 3549333545530 4 10k 2 225225595 55 gt 54 XP_VMUTE w gt 2 22 PCONT 5 55559 55755 y Ese sS Ow 89 vore zim PCONT Ln sit DET N 51 lt Qoo 5 5 EURO FAN CONT lt FAN_CONT_ e SDA 9 EURO INT H 10601 D 5 82 roam FAN K 5 80852 90 26 54 AVLINK C642 47 m 16V 604 1 2 25 27 25 TO 1 8 UNSW6V I gt 9 5 RESET5V 8 EEPROM RESET 5 ntsETSV 1602 L Bz JL609 imi 9610 gt gt BUSY 22 8 8 2 lt lt STB_RXD UNSWSV D 2 STB TXD GND 1 gt THOOT 5 0627 52 gt GND V 35 1664 0656 0604 0607 B 100 Oiu
38. OUT 3 SYNGRODET _ E FROM 18 432MHz DY AD L3RC hg RECA BOARD 8 cimi MUTE XP VMUTE 136 RECG CN602 js mas _RECG 1880 138 RECB E e scLock 00 180 arm SEE PAGE 3 5 0405407 TUSDA AGC TUG SDATA RECCCR acc 09 CONT TU AUTOP glet TO FROM RD 060 BOARD 7 CN604 5 88 __ 3 5 318 CR R 4 1288 _____ Note CN501 is 21 Pin 1 09 CN501 is 13 Pin 2 23001 1 5 1 LINE 2 IN 8 8 SPDIFO pet lt 14 2 Tla AOUTR 1 4 L1 CVBS Y 413 AOUTR i ovs Vi ii 1 2142 Gb nux 0807 808 DAL 7 AOUTL T PN HL RIN le AOUTL SVIDEO AUX PARALLEL 7 gt SWITCH 17 4117 41 25 i UXB ANNL 10302 P VIDEO 1 1 GIN AUXG COMPARATOR r 7 BLANKINGIN 6g 6 OUT M Qa NONO ki zm FUNCTION SW IN 0UT3 0309310 MUTING m i 18 19 FUNCTION SW IN cvasvvour 6 UNSW12V AITRSTS hg RD 060 BOARD 01701 VY OUTI ITSCK5 AUDIOR CVBS YOUT ITRE05 ITSE05 SEE PAGE 3 5 RIC OUT 0305 209 311 RIC OUT 69 11805 101805 5 s POWER MUTE B OA R D GOUT SWITCH 118005 g 15005 0303 g lt RISM STATUSS 1 STATUSS 1 1 2 i A 2
39. P301 SWITCHING TRANSFORMER D301 L301 D304 531200 3 7uH 11 0506 TO C106 gt 0301 t Sp 1000P 25 438 R303 0104 12V REG 22k C105 P6KE220 1 120 i R309 MES D303 8304 R307 281599 400V C107 C301 270 82k VDD 22 C113 1000 C302 105 SF5LC20U NEV REG UNIT 500V 100 470 UR 1 DICTI4EKA SWITCH R308 SARS01 IC301 2 2k 1 1C101 MTZJT 22B M5237ML MIP 2E5 i HDD UNIT D501 1501 VR501 FCQ06A06 3 7uH 4 7k 1 2 i 9 10502 5 21 1 6vADJ 3 1 3900u 100 R105 44 10V R501 C504 10 1 C503 150 15 i W 1500 24 0106 R503 8507 8508 zur DINL20U 1k 0 220 UNSW 12V C502 GND 12501 2 R506 2 0505 m TL431CLP R505 buy lt 18k GND AV 103 BOARD 1 8 CUP UNSW 6V CN101 D201 z FCQ06A06 mao UNSW SEE PAGE 4 5 L502 E C201 4 a T 4 0202 2 S D601 R201 P201 SW 5V D1NL20U 3900 100 3 15A 10V 16V UNSW 4V C601 L R601 iL C602 C603 D502 mE P602 100u 3 3k 1601 150u P601 ISS355 UNSW 4V 25V 10uH 25V 2A 47 UNSW 8V PCONT C108 pen ay REGULATOR PC101 R112 PS2561AL1 47 PHOTO COUPLER 0110 0 1u 109 iL C114 aV 680P 250V Note components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for saf
40. Timer setings with an overlap indicator wil not be entirely recorded Do you want to continue Yi 2100 2200 AAB DVD a 71 2030 2200 DEF DVD store setting shown select The programme that does not have a mark next to it has priority and the overlapped programmes start recording only after the first programme has finished To cancel the overlapped setting select Cancel To confirm change or cancel a timer recording See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings Timer List on page 47 To extend the recording duration time while recording 1 Press OPTIONS during recording to select Extend Rec and press ENTER Extend Rec Time Set the timer extend functo Day and Time Wed 612 10 00 1 30 Modo Meda 39 080 poses fpe 2 Press t to select the duration time You can set the duration in increments of 10 minutes for a maximum of 60 minutes 3 select OK and press ENTER 41 gt 43 44 46 One Touch Timer If you use the SMARTLINK connection you can easily display the timer programming menu When the TV is turned on or in standby mode press TIMER The recorder automatically turns on and the TV s input is switched to the recorder The Timer programming menu appears Hint If you are recording to the HDD ora DVD R
41. ars 3 am ES Emm CD This section introduces the basic operation to 11 Press 8 4 to select an available TV DATA CD record a current TV programme to the hard system BG DK 1 or L disk HDD or to a disc DVD For an L is only available S French RDR 4 open explanation of how to make timer recordings HX520 and RDR HX920 models To close gt pvp see page 40 receive broadcasts in France select L 12 Select Channel using HDD Channel PROG 4 TV DVD Prog System Channel Name audo 1 Press DVD OW On 2 Press open close and place DISPLAY o disc on the disc tray 13 select the PAY TV Canal Plus analogue programme position using 4 or number buttons Ei E Ej 2 i E E x z E 8 D s 5 8 z 5 lt e D Ej E 8 pay aei REC 14 select PAY TV CANAL using 4 gt m m STOP Basic Channel Setting Recording playing side facing down c wa 4 3 Press amp open close to close the disc Pes Chena Ado tray 1 Press HDD or DvD Wait until LOAD disappears from the If you want to record to a DVD insert a ioi front panel display recordable DVD aa eee Unused DVDs are formatted 2 automatically
42. 0 01 10 25V C415 1 126 933 11 ELECT 100uF 2090 16V 119 1 100 591 91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 109 25V C416 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V 6120 1 100 591 91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 25 C449 1 162 915 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0 5PF 50V C123 1 126 947 11 ELECT 4TuF 20 35V C452 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V C124 1 128 396 11 ELECT CHIP 470uF 20 10 C453 1 115 416 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 001uF 5 25V 6209 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 C454 1 115 416 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 001uF 5 25V C210 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V C455 1 162 919 11 CERAMIC CHIP 22 5 50V C211 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 14 10 16 C456 1 115 416 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 001uF 5 25 C212 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V C601 1 162 970 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 25V C213 1 100 966 91 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20 10V C604 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V C214 1 100 966 91 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20 10V C607 1 126 947 11 ELECT 4TuF 20 35V C215 1 100 966 91 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20 10V C613 1 162 909 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 25PF 50V C216 1 100 966 91 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20 10V C614 1 162 909 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 25PF 50V C217 1 162 923 11 CERAMIC CHIP 47 595 50V C615 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V C218 1 162 923 11 CERAMIC CHIP 47 595 50V C616 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 16V C301 1 126 947 11 ELECT 4TuF 20 35V C617 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 16V C304 1 126 933 11
43. 1m step 5 above press a number button repeatedly to select a character Example Press the number 3 button once to enter Press the number 3 button three times to enter F 2 Press ENTER and select the next character 3 Select Finish and press ENTER Hint You can switch between A upper case a lower case or Symbol by pressing INPUT SELECT Checking the remaining disc space You can check the remaining disc space using the Disc Information display 1 inserta disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 27 2 Press OPTIONS to select Disc Information and press ENTER The Disc Information display appears Available settings differ depending on the disc type Example When a DVD R W is inserted Disc Information Disc Date 1310208 2810208 3 SP THOON LSP THTSM LP 2H00M 3H00M SLP 4Ho0M Remainder 234768 Remainder approximate remaining recording time in each of the recording modes Disc space bar Remaining disc space total disc space m w 5 E ri 9 D E lt s lt s Hint increase disc space see open up disc space page 64 6 Labe
44. 1uF 10 C125 1 128 994 21 ELECT CHIP 4TuF 20 10V C126 1 126 209 11 ELECT CHIP 100uF 20 4 6127 1 128 994 21 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20 10 6128 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C129 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C130 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C131 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C132 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C133 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C134 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C135 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C136 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C137 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C138 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C139 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C140 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C141 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C142 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C143 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C144 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C145 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C146 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C147 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C148 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 8 11 RD 060 Ref No Part No Description C149 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C150 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C151 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0152 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C153 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0154 1 125
45. 29 8 to SCART input MENU 7 Select Basic and press ENTER et SCART cord SCART cord not supplied SEBEIURN Basi Channel Seting not supplied Chama aide Page to AERIAL OUT oo 22 to G LINE 1 TV to LINE 3 DECODER 1 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 8 select Channel Setting and press 5 2 Select SETUP and press ENTER ENTER Basic Channel Setting DVD recorder amp BCLS Chama Seti A Vel Gram Sart Ad Pra Fae Prog System Channel Name DAT Ago AFT mwe fee Eng 8 sm s DK 0 3 B8 cs On gt 3 9 Press 4 4 to select the desired Select Video and press ENTER programme position and press ENTER EVE Basic Channel Setting a Sear Sang 1 uis Patre Mode Rus PAL Diez Prog Sym Channel Namo Ado Ans 1 CEN 2 ok 86 OF gt 25 10 Select System using CEET Eight Basic Operations 2 Recording a 4 1 Inserting Disc HDD GD Gm On Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder Prog System Channel N i n on J
46. 88 AT2DATA 1 eo aa 4 ma AT2DATA O 10 A cso a7 AT2DATA 15 IDE AS CS 1 188 R1053 81056 DASP 39 10 HX520 AEP1 2 3 HX720 AEP2 HX722 HX920 FUP OK HX520 UK HX525 HX720 UK HX725 HX727 HX925 4 25 4 26 RISM3 RD 060 1 7 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 41 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 RD 060 BOARD 2 7 10 NO MARK REC PB MODE R REC MODE P PB MODE Regs SA_XRST B AT2RESET gt w SA 07 AT2DATA 7 gt air 235 AT2DATA 8 LW T IN NI D6 AT2DATA 6 88219 SADS AT2DATA 9 a 8 5 SA S M w 2 10 AT2DATA 4 8220 SAD C AT2DATA 11 SACDS T AT2DATA 3 50116 W AT2DATA 12 Tod 88 05 AT2DATA 2 RB221 SA D13 AT2DATA 13 0 cac gt fW SiUM AT2DATAI14 ER W TW SA 00 AT2DATA 0 gt RB222 D 68 2 15 1 7 E SA DREQ AT2DMARQ lt lt R225 SA_IOW AT2DIOW AM R226 SA AT2DIOR w 227 SA_IORDY AT2IORDY lt lt w R228 SA_DACK AT2DMACK gt AM R229 INT AT2INTRQ lt lt w R231 SA AT2ADR 1 AE 4 es SA 0 0 SA ote y AT2
47. Fixed at H SDA 1 Fixed at H SDA 0 Fixed at H AT2DATA 6 Input output of data 6 for HDD driver AT2DATA 9 Input output of data 9 for HDD driver AT2DATA 5 Input output of data 5 for HDD driver AT2DATA 10 Input output of data 10 for HDD driver VDD33 Power supply input Digital 3 3V VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND SDCL 0 Fixed at H SDCL 1 Fixed at H INT 2 Input of interrupt request GPIO INT 1 Fixed at H INT 0 Fixed at H AT2RESET Output of reset signal Fixed at H 5 9 AT2DATA 7 Input output of data 7 for HDD driver Function AT2DATAIS Input output of data 8 for HDD driver VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V DDATA 30 Input output of data 30 for SDRAM DDATA 31 Input output of data 31 for SDRAM VDD25 Power supply input Digital 2 5V HWAIT Fixed at H VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V AIDDATAI Fixed at H AMCLKI Input of audio master clock 36 864MHz AILRCKI Fixed at H ADATAO Output
48. and press ENTER Then select the setting for the audio input Stereol default Records original sound only Normally select this when dubbing a DV format tape Mix Records both stereo 1 and 2 Stereo2 Records additional audio only Select Mix or Stereo2 only if you have added a second audio channel when recording with your digital video camera You are ready to start dubbing Select one of the dubbing methods on the following pages 6 Adjust the dubbing picture quality and size Before dubbing starts press OPTIONS to select Rec Settings and adjust the recording settings page 46 Hint You can turn off the recorder during dubbing The recorder completes dubbing even after being turned off Notes You cannot connect more than one piece of digital video equipment to the recorder You cannot control the recorder using another device or another recorder of the same model You cannot record date time or the contents of the cassette memory onto the disc If you record from a DV Digital8 format tape that is recorded in multiple sound tracks such as a tape with multiple sampling frequencies 48 kHz 44 1 kHz or 32 kHz no sound or an unnatural sound will be output when playing back the sampling frequency switch point on the disc In order to use this recorder s Auto Chapter setting page 79 80 be sure to correctly set the clock on your digital video ca
49. 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 5 Remarks 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 116W 116W 116W 116W 1 16 RD 060 Ref No Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks 197 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R318 1 218 941 81 RES CHIP 100 5 1 16W 198 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R223 1 218 940 11 82 5 1 16W R322 1 218 957 11 2 2 5 1 16 R224 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R225 1 218 940 11 RES CHIP 82 5 1 16W R323 1 218 957 11 2 2 5 1 16W HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R226 1 218 940 11 RES CHIP 82 5 1 16W R325 1 218 941 81 RES CHIP 100 5 1 16W R227 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 R228 1 218 940 11 RES CHIP 82 5 1 16W R325 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 HX925 R229 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W R231 1 218 940 11 82 5 1 16W 328 1 2
50. 2 Enter your four digit password using the number buttons 3 Press ENTER to select The recorder starts playback To register or change the password see Parental Control DVD VIDEO only on page 94 Notes Angles and subtitles cannot be changed with titles recorded on this recorder Slideshows made with a DVD camcorder can only be played Other play functions such as fast forward cannot be used Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a CD When playing DTS encoded CDs excessive noise will be heard from the analogue stereo jacks To avoid possible damage to the audio system the consumer should take proper precautions when the analogue stereo jacks of the recorder are connected to an amplification system To enjoy DTS Digital Surround playback an external DTS decoder must be connected to the DIGITAL OUT jack of the recorder Set the sound to Stereo using the AUDIO button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD page 54 Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound track DTS audio signals are output only through the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL jack When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks set DTS to On in the Audio setup page 91 Adjusting the picture quality HDD EM GD Gs E DivX video only 1 Press OPTIONS during playback to select Video Settings and press ENTER Video Settings Select the item yo
51. 27 27 m K penas incur 10 nore 2 RST 34 34 2 35 35 IDE 8 5 se io se i DEM L 3 09838 M 8 EIE Ia lalelelelelelalclelelalelalle g al dal felel lella Ela sw Lo cuo 944442 51318151 lol 8 513 421515 51551815 2 5 5 15 8 21513888 2 111112 117 55 1 90 M EPEPEREPIE 81528 999 4 2 8 8 E ar amp 8 1 Kevo N 7 2 uen cx RH 054 s D 5 HARNESS s 5 515 240 1 300 mov mw meo 2 8 7 iii ue 1 s rows DELI 0 DET s 5 vem SATA HDD es v rem 4 1 m FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 4 2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS In addition to this the necessary note is printed in each block For schematic diagrams All capacitors are in uF unless otherwise n
52. 813 866 215122136515 215199212 5 nz 100 5 i Au al 1 4 g lt lt lt S S a 2 5 2 o 5 S gt gt 5 22 2 2 aad 8 9 8 d 8 8 2 sislelels VY AD I al 2 FB808 NNCD3 9F T1 EE 136 FB809 138 e H m STZ6 8N T146 D809 2 STZ6 8N T146 Kuen D gt 853 6809 0815 e 0p Sov F UDZSTE 176 28 w UDZSTE 1713B T 10802 C854 BD3826FS 100 50 TUDV R820 5 100 AUX_L_OUT 0843 0825 TUL RET RE du 526841146 UDZSTE 176 2B T0 4 8 TUR w 100 100k AUX R OUT B I 0811 ASW1 100k FS_AUX_IN 5 R860 R889 AUX 1960 STZ6 8N T146 4 AUX L IN 1827 100 AUX_R_IN w 100 DET DA ird RES SEDI I STZ6 8N T146 STZ6 8N T146 TO 3 8 DA R w 1 AU2INR T ASW3 LLIN Ni 220p C851 J c um my m 2 10802 ot u DIO IN OUT Es b 4 R879 L 0852 54 8806 8808 100k 220 F 2207 R803 C864 de de 100k 100 100k L1 R OUT 10 FB821 D813 D823 D827 C809 C818 Y E C827 B STZ6 8N T146 5126 8 1146 STZ6 8N T146 du ogu 12V 10V B 4 FS_AUX_OUT P FB822 RB27 100 FS_L1_0UT ASW5 AD_L OUT EU AU OUT L 2 8 ASW6 AD_R_OUT EU AU OUT R 0810
53. CONT VEE 5 8 NP GND V gt C774 C775 47u 25V 0716 MUN2213T1 1 SWITCH B CN501 0 01 13 EXCEPT HX520 725 72 7 AEP3 HX920 HX925 21 HX520 725 7 27 AEP3 HX920 HX925 VIDEO IN OUT AV 103 6 8 4 15 MSD601 RST1 07 EJ R753 2200 C716 47 25V 47u 01 25V 0714 0715 40718 25V 0728 STZ6 8N T146 R780 75 D721 STZ6 8N T146 0715 STZ6 8N T146 41733 w 0702 STZ6 8N T146 0731 STZ6 8N T146 1146 0732 5726 81 n 4703 VIDEO 0UT 4 16 AUDIO VIDEO LINE2 S VIDEO RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms
54. The recorder starts recording only after detecting a video signal from the connected equipment The beginning of the programme may not be recorded regardless of whether or not the recorder s power is on or off During Synchro Recording other operations such as normal recording cannot be performed To use the connected equipment while the recorder is standing by for Synchro Recording cancel Synchro Recording by pressing gt SYNCHRO REC Be sure to turn off the connected equipment and press 9 SYNCHRO REC to reset Synchro Recording before the timer The Synchro Rec function does not work when Line3 Input of Scart Setting et to Decoder in the Video setup page 89 The Synchro Rec function does not work with some tuners For details see s operating instructions While the recorder is standing by for Synchro Recording the Auto Clock Set function page 87 does not work To use the Synchro Rec function you must first set the recorder s clock correctly If the timer settings of a Synchro Recording and another timer recording overlap Regardless of whether or not the programme is a Synchro Rec programme the programme that starts first has priority and the second programme starts recording only after the first programme has finished 7 00 8 00 9 00 10 00 First programme Second will but off 1 12 scr
55. lt 6 gt gt lt gt lt 7 gt lt gt lt 8 gt gt lt RETURN gt lt 9 gt lt RETURN gt 10 gt lt RETURN gt lt RETURN gt lt lt Display Color gt gt 1 White Signal ON 2 White Signal OFF lt lt Total Tme gt gt 1 Total Power ON 2 Total DVD Playback 3 Total DVD Recording lt lt Error History gt gt Up or Down lt lt History Clear gt gt Execute History Clear Yes No lt lt Factory Set up gt 1 NOR Factory Set up 2 S AND Factory Set up 3 HDD Data Factory Set up lt lt Device Check gt 1 EEPROM Check 2 Super AND Check 3 Video Dec Device Check 4 ODR Data Check 5 IT Setting lt lt HDD gt gt 1 Indcate ID 2 Performance Check 3 Write ID 4 Format 5 Factory Check 6 Write Registration Code lt lt G code OSD Setting Menu gt gt 1 G CODE 2 Show View 3 Video Plus 4 VCR Plus Verifying version number of the respective software of the main unit Setting ON OFF of the PAL 100 white signal output Reading the accumulative operating hours of the drive Total power on hours Total DVD playback hours Total DVD recording hours Display format OO hours AA minutes Displaying the error history in the past in the error code Maximum 20 errors can be displayed Displaying history of the buttons pr
56. 1 6K 470 39K 22K 22 22 22 22 22 75 2 2K 2 2K 2 2K 2 2K 2 2K 1K 10K 4 7K 10K 75 75 75 100 100 2 2 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 220 100 75 75 75 75 75 100 100 100 100 68 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 Ref Description R865 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R866 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R867 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R868 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R869 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R870 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R871 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP R872 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP R873 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 8874 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R875 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R876 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R877 1 216 845 11
57. 50 Gris lt D 91 UPD72852AGB 8EU A AUDD PHYDIO 0 sM 6703 PHYDIO 4 M73 0 01 C714 R723 2 zM B 0 01 716 5100 PHYDIO 3 W TpAOn 18 270 0 5 RB702 CH TpBOp 47 TpBOn 8 2n 7 AGND PHYDIO 4 22 6 5 717 PHYDIO 5 41 NN 3 PHYDIO 6 PHYDIO 7 2 MEA C715 RB701 iu E 47 10V R701 0 2W AW 702 376MH SW3 4V 24 o 10 T0 5 7 T GND gt L4 C701 10u B 6 3V DV PHY RD 060 6 7 4 35 4 36 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms Refer to page 4 41 for printed wiring board 1 802 16802 RD 060 BOARD 7 7 ICS650G 42LFT R823 5 PLL AUDIO AD DA AW NO MARK REC PB MODE 34 dos R816 15 1 7 B 68 OUT 768FSCHG AW NOT USE lt REF27M1 lt lt W REF27M1 FSEL 34 17 FSEL 768FS441K 8826 A768FS48K 16 3 4 cari 52 768 548 0 01u B GND Wear B 100 A768FS441K HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 VMCLK lt lt 10k RTS 1 gt XLMUTE 8111 1 XRMUTE TO 1 5 RX 1 ud 7 4 i EXCEPT NMSSEUGEDSIRV IC 803 1 1 20 25 E H
58. 925 R627 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10 5 1 10W R334 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R628 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W R335 1 216 841 11 METAL CHIP 47K 5 1 10W R629 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R336 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R630 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 520 725 727 920 925 R631 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W R337 1 216 841 11 METAL CHIP 47K 5 1 10W HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R632 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W R338 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R633 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 635 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W R339 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R636 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 520 725 727 920 925 R637 1 218 289 11 METAL CHIP 510 5 1 10W R340 1 216 829 11 METAL CHIP 4 7K 5 1 10W R342 1 216 829 11 METAL CHIP 4 7K 5 1 10W R638 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R639 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 1 10 343 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10W R642 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 1 10W R344 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10W R643 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 520 725 727 920 925 R644 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 345 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 1K 5 1 10W R346 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 1K 5 1 10W R347 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 1K 5 1 10W R
59. Code Day and Time Today 19 52 20 52 wode 59 DD PlusGode No Co 2 select ShowView No using and press ENTER HDD Picture Size DVD Rec Picture Size Sets the picture size of the programme to be recorded 4 3 default Sets the picture size to 4 3 16 9 Sets the picture size to 16 9 wide mode Auto HDD only Automatically selects the actual picture size DVD Rec Picture Size works with DVD RWs DVD Rs Video mode when the recording mode is set to HQ HSP SP LSP or ESP For all other recording modes the screen size is fixed at 4 3 For DVD Rs DVD RWs VR mode the actual picture size is recorded regardless of the setting For example if a 16 9 size picture is received the disc records the picture as 16 9 even if DVD Rec Picture Size is set to 4 3 For DVD RWSs DVD RSs the screen size is fixed at 4 3 Rec NR noise reduction Reduces noise contained in the video signal Rec Video Equalizer Adjusts the picture in greater detail Press t to select the item you want to adjust then press ENTER Contrast Changes the contrast Brightness Changes the overall brightness Colour Makes the colours deeper or lighter 3 Adjust the setting using gt and press ENTER The default setting is underlined Rec NR weak Off 1 2 3 strong Rec Video Equalize
60. HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 3 2 AV 103 BLOCK DIAGRAM SSS M SS SSS ee 1 AV 103 BOARD 1C702 WIDE SELI 32 wW 702 CVBS OUT Y lUNEZOUT SELECTOR I SVIDEO Y 1 7 svor 6 VIDEO m 9 1 CB TQ AUDIO L cves3 cb OUT P CR R AERIAL Z 4 ADOR TU VIDEO 4 pm 0702768 SYNCIN 4 i iN Q 080 2 SLICE OUT 60 SYNC SEP CB J703 0709 RECVY CR 101401 cvm VIDEO OUT out EURO MSP CR CB Y CB B 0710 RECCCR ar AUDIO OUT 6 63 IN VEG 0313 H 01401 1402 0711 COAXIAL 501 OUTL 61 a 1 00 cri VSYNGOLT 6 DIGITAL OUT 2 ANA IN TUR E SC1 OUT R 60 our 6 FSW 1 FSW SDA 43 SDA X41401
61. IDE D3 11 pt Tq X REC656CLKI 12 RTS 1 gt SDCL O ro 4 SCLKI1 m iE pi 15 8 Boneh OTS cour ae nes R1001 UE 16 9 AN 0 ROUT 2040 W AT2ADRI1 IDE po 17 RBIOS AT2IORDY mem 2 van 041 100 cour N WEDS 18 AT2INTRO a gt cout SND 18 les AT2RESET 20 rg REcvY NG Jrs AT2DIOR UNT ge IDE 21 Alls nis AT2DIOW X 22 100 9 0 AT2DMACK PHYDIO O D p R131 w lt lt AT2DMARQ 24 0 2 meo 1 R1010 1777 21246 AW AK 3 Rie 4 Pivos ____________ gt 26 0 abet d 15403334 Qn EET 0 5 k PHYDIOM S PHYDIOM IDE oRDY 27 Rigs F PHYDIOIS 9 AT2DATA 7 Puvolo s 28 PHYDI0 6 T 29 74 U AT2DATAIS PHYDIO 7 2 4 rines ee 8 0 PHYLREQ x 4 TPDATAT west ss PHYCTL 0 MEE P
62. 0 010 0 07 0237 10V 01 C209 iut T0 1 7 3 7 4 7 AW XSYSRST gt FB201 B e SW3 4V 1201 ow AB L202 10uH C223 2 10 0321 4 5 6 3V 8 5 WT 2012 2 222 1 8V REG en SS z 10u a e 5 6 3V 5 5 616 2012 5 8 lt lt GND 4 28 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 41 for printed wiring board RD 060 BOARD 3 7 RDR HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 PES REC656H A V DEC esa 585 0328 so 333 d C331 ae Ne REC MODE B 88 88 B 88 EN 656110 P REC6561 0 65611 REC656IH E 656112 REC656I 2 C316 B 010 B REC656I 3 6561 3 B 6561 4 6561 4 656 51 REC656I 5 RECVY_V gt 07 1 7 6561 6 REC6561 6 1 7 RECCR_V 0 6561 7 a REC6561 7 o5 18526 2 82568584 RECGSGCLKI 65 5 8 9 6 6 E c
63. 1 19 Program EIL 1 20 Settings and Adjustments TRE AE ENERO ARE SEEN AER ayy ce 1 20 Aerial Reception and Language Settings Basic 1 20 Video Settings Video enn 1 22 Audio Settings Audio nennen 1 22 Recording Settings Recording 9 1 23 Disc Settings DVD nennen 1 23 Remote Control Settings Factory Settings Others 1 24 Easy Setup Resetting the Recorder 1 24 Additional Information 1 24 Troubleshooting 1 24 Self diagnosis Function When letters numbers appear in the display 1 26 Notes About This Recorder 1 26 Specifications eene 1 26 About t LINKS 3 etre et he ee a 1 26 Guide to Parts and Controls 1 27 Language Code List snn 1 28 200652 loea tis en Mac 1 28 2 DISASSEMBLY 2 1 CASE BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2 2 2 2 TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY 2 2 2 3 FRONT PANEL SECTION 2 3 2 4 FR 240 BOARD FL 159 BOARD 2 3 5 5 E 2 4 256 o DVD DRIV 2 4 2 7 103 BOARD 22222 055 2 8 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK 2 6 2 9 RD 060 BOARD 997 3 10 TG Re emet 2 7 2 11 CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION 2 8 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3 1 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM HII 3 1 3 2 103 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 3 RD 060 B
64. 1005 4 RB113 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005 4 RB701 1 234 371 21 RES NETWORK 47 1005 4 RB114 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 1005 4 RB702 1 234 371 21 RES NETWORK 47 1005 4 RB115 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005X4 703 1 234 371 21 RES NETWORK 47 1005 4 RB116 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005X4 VIBRATOR RB117 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005X4 RB118 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005X4 X201 1 813 210 11 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL NX5032GA RB119 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005X4 X301 1 781 940 41 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 14 318MHz RB120 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005X4 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX920 HX925 X701 1 813 695 11 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 24 576MHz RB121 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005 4 X801 1 781 867 21 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 27MHz RB122 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005X4 Haw c RI ee 2 21 RB123 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005X4 RB124 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005X4 1 468 961 11 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK RB142 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010 4 RB143 1 234 702 11 RES NETWORK 68 1005X4 CAPACITOR RB144 1 234 702 11 RES NETWORK 68 1005X4 RB145 1 234 702 11 RES NETWORK 68 1005X4 AN C101 METALLIZED 0 1uF 250V RB146 1 234 702 11 RES NETWORK 68 1005X4 A C102 METALLIZED 0 1uF 250V RB149 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010 4 A C103 CERAMIC 100pF 250V A C104 CERAMIC 100pF 250V RB150 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010X4 A C112 CERAMIC 680pF 250V RB151 1
65. 1601 1602 46 34 a a 2 N aS gt 8 8 0 6 82 BRE usos 8 215 2 3 4V REG lt lt GND eA z 16601 a D a iE 85 Ea RECR PERI 859 Ar es 5 3 7 REG FSW C601 4 t 6602 603 e VDEC3 3V 0 01 104 10 R635 dn Sa th R658 RECCR_V B B B 4700 885 E geo nm 1k RECCR_V 16V 63V 63V RECVY_V RECVY_V 0805 C606 C607 0611 C609 3 XX 10 Qu 10 47u B B B B 10V 63V 63 63V 10V 4 33 4 34 AV CN POWER RD 060 5 7 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 41 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 g 9 10 11 RD 060 BOARD 6 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 lt XSYSRST 4 7 5 7 PHYLPS PHYLREQ ANY R733 33 B 701 ILE 5 R703 A TO TpBIAS1 FR 240 BOARD C 09 100 DEND C712 are CN3005 1 7 W p QM PAGE 4 23 B 2 IC DL TpAip e WF e 2 C702 2 61712 82427 UL DVDD 1 LSID 1 6 5 3 6 AW TpB1 Ww PETS 5 44 3 1 701 EN 4 5 01714 PHYCTLI1 W CTL1 1 zd tt e RB703 P io 47 DV INVERFACE AGND HE ouk um DO
66. 27 W REC STOP button 27 gt 6 SYNCHRO REC button 49 REC MODE button 27 25 TV 2A volume buttons 17 26 TV VC on standby button 17 27 TV PROG programme buttons 17 The button has a tactile dot 28 TV button 17 Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating the recorder jeuonippy gt 109 Programme position TV Direct Rec indication 27 appears in the right most two digits NICAM indicator 41 TV indicator 27 Disc type e angle indicator 52 j O You can turn off the front panel display when the recorder is turned off by setting Dimmer to Save Power in the Others setup page 96 Rear panel m AERIAL IN OUT jacks 12 DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL jack 15 LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L VIDEO jacks 13 15 LINE 2 OUT S VIDEO jack 13 N id gt 5 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y Ps Pr Cr jacks 13 LINE 3 DECODER jack 13 AC IN terminal 16 LINE 1 jack 13 111 112 Language Code List For details see page 95 The language spellings conform to the ISO
67. HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 100PF 5 50V HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 100PF 5 50V HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 100PF 5 50V HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 100PF 5 50V HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 100PF 5 50V HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 520 725 727 920 925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 520 725 727 920 925 0 1uF 1090 10 520 725 727 920 925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX
68. R325 C302 HX520 AEP1 2 UK HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 AEP1 UK HX727 AEP1 E 10u u 100 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 o W 6 3V 6 3V 0 HX925 V DEC 4 29 4 30 RD 060 3 7 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 41 for printed wiring board RD 060 BOARD 4 7 FLASH ROM SUPER AND NO MARK REC PB MODE Voltage measurement of the CSP IC and the Transistors with A mark is not possible SW3 4V gt TO 5 7 GND gt HMS 0 lt m HMS 0 TDI TMS DBT TDI 05 Dat lt CS lt HCS 0 wA HCS 0 HDATAIBI lt HDATA 0 INTE HGATABI RDATA 1 HDATA 0 orna X HDATA 2 11 HDATA BI HDATAI2 HDATA 4 HDATA S HDATA 5 HDATA 4 ATA 6 5 4 HDATA 7 6 7 z HDATA 8
69. Remove the D C fan in the direction of the arrow The wire pin that holds the harness is set up 2 103 Two tapping screws BV 3x 10 2 7 2 11 CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION Power supply block AV 103 board FL 159 board c NE gt 5 re FR 240 board RD 060 board RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 SECTION 3 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3 1 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM o Jn AV 1 03 BOARD LINE 2 OUT 1 1 702 i 5 SELECTOR 1 TU401 AERIAL Y CB CR gt 5 VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L AUDIO R J703 COMDONGNT VIDEO OUT Y CB CR TU VIDEO TUDV RECVY RECCCR 1 1401 EURO MSP
70. The selected settings return to their default settings 4 Press ENTER when Finish appears Format You can erase all titles recorded on the HDD Picture noise appears gt If the picture output signal from your recorder passes through your VCR to get to your or if you are connected to a combination TV VIDEO player the copy protection signal applied to some DVD programmes could affect picture quality If you still experience this problem even when you connect your recorder directly to your TV try connecting your recorder to your TV s S VIDEO input gt You have set the recorder to progressive format even though your TV cannot accept the progressive signal In this case hold down and press PROGRAM minus on the unit gt Even if your TV is compatible with progressive format 525p 625p signals the image may be affected when you set the recorder to progressive format In this case hold down and press PROGRAM minus on the unit and the recorder is set to normal interlace format You are playing a DVD recorded colour system that is different from your TV gt Noise may appear in the pictures recorded on the HDD which is due to the characteristics of HDD and is not a malfunction When playing a double layer DVD the video and audio may be momentarily interrupted at the point where the layers switch TV programme reception does not fill the screen Set the
71. button the connected equipment to cancel the playback pause status The connected equipment starts playback and the playback image is recorded by this recorder stop recording press REC STOP on this recorder If you connect digital video camera with a DV IN jack See DV Dubbing on page 77 for an explanation of how to record from the DV IN jack Hint You can adjust the settings for the recording picture before recording See Adjusting the recording picture quality and size on page 46 Notes When recording a video game image the screen may not be clear Any programme that contains Copy Never copy guard signal cannot be recorded The recorder continues to record but a blank screen will be recorded 51 Playback Playing HDD GS 8 EB 73 01902 CD 1 HDD AUDIO 0 SUBTITLE Te TOP MENU MENU TITLE LIST lt 44 oeo 52159 er 44414 1 Press HDD or DVD If you select DVD insert a disc see 1 Inserting a Disc on page 27 Ta Tu DVD Number 9 99 B PROG buttons eee 3 Select the title and press ENTER The sub menu appears 4 Select Play and press ENTER Playback starts from the selected title To use the DVD s Menu When you play a DVD VIDEO or a finalised DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R or
72. n o o e HDD o e REC STOP REMOTO CONTROL R3015 R3020 R3024 RECEIVER S3003 Z 3300 53009 3300 S3014 2200 REC MODE IC3002 REC 5 5 INPUT_SELECT GP1UM28XK0SF 83004 5600 ot STOP R3017 900 e DUB R3012 0 3004 0 01 16V DV REMOCON RECEIVER FUNCTION SW LED FR 240 4 23 4 24 14 CN3003 15 GND IT GND FL POW 6V 12 LED DIM FR 5V 10 SIRCS SIRCS_5V LED_DT LED_RST LED_CK LED_STB FLD_STB KEYO KEY1 2 103 BOARD 5 8 CN602 PAGE 4 14 15 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 41 for printed wiring board
73. wire that holds harness is set 2 7 103 2 CN103 258 2 The wire pin that holds the harness is set up The wire that holds gt the harness is up ZA ZA 5 The wire pin that holds the harness is set up Connector 701 Flexible flat cable FAR 004 CN602 3 Panel rear D C fan Eight tapping screws BV 3x 10 Five tapping screws BV 3x 8 7 Connector CN3 es 1 601 3 Screw 3 x 3 Remove the AV 103 board in the direction of the arrow 9 Flexible flat cable FRA 003 CN501 Flexible flat cable FRA 005 CN502 2 5 2 8 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK 4 Four tapping screws BV 3x 8 Remove the Power supply block in the direction of the arrow 3 Tapping screw p di 4BV 3x 10 P dd 2 Connector 2 9 RD 060 BOARD 9 Four tapping screws BV 3 x 8 RD 060 board Flexible flat cable FRA 003 CN604 Flexible flat cable FRA 005 CN603 2 Flexible flat cable FRA 004 CN602 Connector CN203 G Flexible flat cable d FRD 010 101 78 wire pin that holds Connector Connector the harness is set up CN601 CN701 2 10 4
74. 0 BYTE HADRS 16 16 9 HADRS 15 NC 22 HADRS 8 0 24 HADRS 7 FL501 2o B4 An HADRS 6 51 T RB551V 30TE 17 HADRS 14 C501 C502 C508 10u 10 B 6 3V 6 3V hei 0 AM XSYSRST INTE CTS 2 ast 58 RX 2 B TX 2 bd e R513 R519 B 10k 10k R518 10k FLASH ROM SUPER AND RD 060 4 7 4 31 4 32 01 gt 1 7 2 7 3 7 5 7 6 7 1 7 5 7 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 41 for printed wiring board A 1 2 RD 060 BOARD 5 7 AV CN POWER REF N0 10000 SERIES EXCEPT HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 10 11 12 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 13 14 15 ee 1 CN604 13P XRMUTE MARK REC PB MODE 8612 13 CR R 1 XRMUTE 22 680 XLMUTE l GND_
75. 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 6 3V 10V 10V 10V 16V 6 3V 16V 10V 16V 16V RD 060 Ref No Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description 10 R108 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP R109 1 218 941 81 RES CHIP 10101 6 702 302 01 TK11133CSCL G R110 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 10102 6 704 573 01 M24C32 WMNET 111 1 218 941 81 RES CHIP 10103 6 708 896 01 R8A34012BG 112 1 218 990 81 5 10105 6 708 305 01 K4H511638C UCB3T 10106 6 708 305 01 K4H511638C UCB3T 113 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 114 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10108 6 708 935 01 IC 1762 115 1 218 962 11 RES CHIP 10109 6 702 302 01 TK11133CSCL G R116 1 218 961 11 10201 6 806 103 01 88SA8040 TBC1C000 R123 1 218 965 11 10202 6 705 311 01 S T111B18MC OGDTFG 16301 6 708 848 01 TVP5146M2PFP 124 1 218 957 11 520 725 920 925 125 1 218 957 11 126 1 218 957 11 RES CHIP 165302 6 708 882 01 18 R127 1 218 957 11 RES CHIP 520 725 920 925 128 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 10502 6 708 924 01 S29GL256N90TFIR20 601 6 708 889 01 IC MP2105DJ LF Z 129 1 218 935 11 RES CHIP 1602 6 706 237 01 1 55 25 130 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 10604 8 759 660 23 SN74HCTO8APWR 131 1 218 933 11 132 1 218
76. 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10W R1411 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W R1412 1 216 846 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W R1416 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W 81417 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 470 5 1 10 R1418 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 1K 5 1 10W R1419 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 1K 590 1 10W R1451 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R1452 1 218 895 11 METAL CHIP R1453 1 218 905 11 METAL CHIP 1K 596 1 10 R1454 1 218 885 11 METAL CHIP 525 725 727 925 R1601 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 1 10 525 725 727 925 1602 1 216 833 11 METAL 150 5 1 10 1603 1 216 833 11 METAL 525 725 727 925 1604 1 216 833 11 METAL 680 5 1 10 R1609 1 216 847 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R1610 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 1K 590 1 10W HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R1613 1 216 837 11 METAL CHIP R1614 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 1K 590 1 10W R1621 1 216 839 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R1624 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 0 R1625 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 100K 590 1 10W 81626 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R1627 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 1K 5 1 10W R1628 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R1629 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 150 590 1 10 R1630 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R1632 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 4 7 5 1 10 1633 1 216 821 11 METAL
77. 2 AAA 000 0015 8 Qe R 543 515 5 51515 6 STIS asc em d 2 HAD YeY N NAN N NA SYSYSYS SYSY YSYSYEY2YS u gt HADRS 24 50908 Doo um 8 ME DDT2 30 HADRS 26 Rer prune 8 858 88 28 852 885855808 pere 5 C 88588 Ero D cx 4 excep vats 6 5 88 5845844845555555 54555 55525555 SS 9888 58 BS 2252292929484255454545 HX520 AEP3 2 vssa 5 KADRS rod 5 0025 HX725 AEP3 5 9112 Du 21 VDD VSS d E DDT2 19 c DDT2 28 NAND CS La 27 V5 AT E HXT2T AEP3 5 3 vree 05 10 B VBD VDD33 1 gt 1Hx9207Hx925 DDT2 20 C DDT2 27 ip Him e t T 5 toe 5 u 2 8 2 o3 gud S VT DADRISQL 918 cw 622 gt lt CSYNC REC65617 5 2 ROT JETES REGES 2 B Saas DDT2 26 iNT 2 223 TEST REC65616 Et 170 2 D 2 25 HDATA15 REC65615 1 DDT2 22 S 006 pos 5 DDT2 25 22 HDATA14 BEC65614 5 RIOT 0 E HBATALS 0
78. 43 10 SN74AHC1GOODCKR 0613 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 Q614 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 101401 6 702 714 01 MSP3417G QG B8V3 Q615 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 Q616 8 729 904 87 TRANSISTOR 2SB1197K R lt JACK gt 0702 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 J702 1 818 363 11 JACK BLOCK PIN LINE2 OUT 0705 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 J703 1 818 063 11 JACK PIN 3P COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 0707 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 41101 1 764 188 31 JACK SMALL TYPE DIA 3 5 G LINK 0708 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 0709 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 lt COIL gt 0710 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 Q711 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 L401 1 414 856 11 INDUCTOR 10uH 0715 8 729 904 87 TRANSISTOR 2SB1197K R L402 1 469 967 21 INDUCTOR 10uH 0716 6 551 199 01 TRANSISTOR BCR148 E6327 L403 1 414 858 31 INDUCTOR 1mH 0801 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 L404 1 414 856 11 INDUCTOR 10uH L405 1 414 856 11 INDUCTOR 10uH 0807 6 550 683 01 TRANSISTOR RJK005N03 T146 0808 8 729 027 24 TRANSISTOR DTA114TKA T146 L406 1 414 856 11 INDUCTOR 10uH 01104 8 729 045 17 TRANSISTOR 258156171000 1601 1 412 533 21 INDUCTOR 47uH 525 725 727 925 1602 1 412 533 21 INDUCTOR 47uH 01401 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 L701 1 412 060 11 INDUCTOR 22uH 01402 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 L702 1 469 967 21 INDUCTOR 10uH lt RESISTOR gt L703 1 469
79. 47 5 1 16W R655 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R1042 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R1043 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R656 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 R658 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 1K 5 1 10 1044 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W R661 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R1045 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W 701 1 216 864 11 5 0 1046 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W R703 1 218 941 81 RES CHIP 100 5 1 16W R1047 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W 1051 1 218 953 11 1K 5 1 16W R705 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W R706 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 1K 5 1 16W R1053 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W 709 1 218 941 81 RES CHIP 100 5 1 16W HX520 UK HX525 HX720 UK HX725 HX727 HX925 R710 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W R1054 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W R711 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W R1055 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W R1056 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W R712 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W HX520 AEP1 2 3 HX720 AEP2 HX722 HX920 R713 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W R1060 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R714 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W R715 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W R1061 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R717 1 208 910 11 METAL CHIP 9 1K 0 5 1 16 81062 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R1063 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R718 1 218 938 11 RES CHIP 56 5 1 16W R1064 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R719 1 218 938 11 RES CHIP 56 5 1 16W R1065 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 721 1 218
80. 47u nm 16V 5 B B 16 2200 16V 16 1601 br B ge 2 22 0626 5 2 POWER FAIL 8623 E 0 1 z 16V 9 5 a Sz ahs abo ata du 8 8 S gt 001 47 47 47 g 2 2 2 2 50 5 50 0611 615 4 25 16 16 AV LINK M 54 R671 100 Bg 7 MODEL HX725 HX525 HX520 HX520 AEP1 2 UK HX727 AEP3 HX725 UK 920 HX720 HX722 R1603 bod yg 33k REF HX925 HX727 AEP1 amp 0612 R648 0 0 xx MSB709 RT1 46 54 z R650 10k 10k xx 26 51 8 8652 100 100 xx 25 2 45 45 0611 K m m x 221111 51 5000 8571 R672 10k 10k A 48 R679 10k 10k x xx e 0 R682 10k xx iog msn R1614 x que R683 10k 10k 10k 105 Es 0615 MSD601 RST1 Note The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified IT CONTROLLER 4 13 4 14 AV 103 5 8 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms AV 103 BOARD 6 8 VIDEO IN OUT NO MARK REC PB MODE REF NO SERIES CN701 FL 159 BOARD CN3101 PAGE 4 21 P R REC MODE PB MODE AU2INL K AU2INR 10 Y2 IN AN GND C2 IN GND V2 IN
81. 5 Q 1 Album MP3 audio track JPEG image file DivX video file When you insert a DATA CD DATA DVD and press D gt the numbered tracks or files are played sequentially from through G For JPEG image files press e to go to the next album For instance when you want to go from to Q Any sub albums tracks or files contained within a currently selected album take priority over the next album in the same tree Example Q contains so played before To rotate a picture Press OPTIONS while the JPEG image is displayed to select Rotate Right or Rotate Left and press ENTER Hints Press AUDIO to switch between stereo monaural audio tracks when playing MP3 audio tracks You can change the audio track when playing MP3 or MPEG audio of DivX video files using the AUDIO button You can display subtitles when playing DivX video files using the SUBTITLE button You can rotate a JPEG image using the gt buttons when the image is displayed Press DISPLAY repeatedly to show information about the JPEG album or image on your TV screen Then press TIME TEXT to toggle between the current selected image number and album number Notes Some JPEG files especially files of three million pixels or more may lengthen the slideshow interval Rotated JPEG images wi
82. 639 1988 E F standard Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language 1027 Afar 1183 Irish 1347 Maori 1507 Samoan 1028 Abkhazian 1186 Scots Gaelic 1349 Macedonian 1508 Shona 1032 Afrikaans 1194 Galician 1350 Malayalam 1509 Somali 1039 Amharic 1196 Guarani 1352 Mongolian 1511 Albanian 1044 Arabic 1203 Gujarati 1353 Moldavian 1512 Serbian 1045 Assamese 1209 Hausa 1356 Marathi 1513 Siswati 1051 Aymara 1217 Hindi 1357 Malay 1514 Sesotho 1052 Azerbaijani 1226 Croatian 1358 Maltese 1515 Sundanese 1053 Bashkir 1229 Hungarian 1363 Burmese 1516 Swedish 1057 Byelorussian 1233 Armenian 1365 Nauru 1517 Swahili 1059 Bulgarian 1235 Interlingua 1369 1521 Tamil 1060 1239 Interlingue 1376 Dutch 1525 Telugu 1061 Bislama 1245 1379 Norwegian 1527 1066 Bengali 1248 Indonesian 1393 Occitan 1528 Thai Bangla 1253 Icelandic 1403 Afan Oromo 1529 Tigrinya 1067 Tibetan 1254 Italian 1408 Oriya 1531 Turkmen 1070 Breton 1257 Hebrew 1417 Punjabi 1532 Tagalog 1079 Catalan 1261 Japanese 1428 Polish 1534 Setswana 1093 Corsican 1269 Yiddish 1435 Pashto 1535 Tonga 1097 Czech 1283 Javanese Pushto 1538 Turkish 1103 Welsh 1287 Georgian 1436 Portuguese 1539 Tsonga 1105 Danish 1297 Kazakh 1463 Quechua 1540 Tatar 1109 German 1298 Greenlandic 1481 Rhaeto 1543 Twi 1130 Bhutani 1299 Cambodian Romance 1557 Ukrainian 1142 Greek 1300 Kannada 1482 Kirundi 1564 Urdu 1144 English 1301 Korean 1483 Romanian 1572 Uzbek 1145 Espe
83. 933 11 RES CHIP 10605 8 759 548 99 IC SN74LVO8APWR 133 1 218 990 81 5 10606 6 703 224 01 S 80828CNNB B8NT2G 10701 6 706 365 01 IC uPD72852AGB 8EU A 134 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 10802 6 708 929 01 ICS650G 42LFT 135 1 218 990 81 5 10803 6 708 888 01 WM8590GEDS RV R136 1 218 935 11 RES CHIP 137 1 218 973 11 RES CHIP lt gt R138 1 218 973 11 RES CHIP 1101 1 469 555 21 INDUCTOR 10uH 139 1 218 973 11 L102 1 469 555 21 INDUCTOR 10uH 140 1 218 973 11 L201 1 469 555 21 INDUCTOR 10uH R141 1 218 973 11 L202 1 469 555 21 INDUCTOR 10uH R142 1 218 973 11 RES CHIP L301 1 469 555 21 INDUCTOR 10uH R143 1 208 699 11 METAL CHIP HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R145 1 218 973 11 L302 1 469 555 21 INDUCTOR 10uH R146 1 208 699 11 METAL CHIP HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R147 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP L303 1 469 555 21 INDUCTOR 10uH 148 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R149 1 218 939 11 RES CHIP L601 1 419 630 21 INDUCTOR 4 7uH L602 1 400 073 21 INDUCTOR 4 7uH R160 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP L603 1 469 555 21 INDUCTOR 10uH R161 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R162 1 218 851 11 METAL CHIP R163 1 218 851 11 METAL CHIP lt LINE FILTER gt 8164 1 211 977 11 METAL CHIP 701 1 400 476 11 COMMON MODE CHOKE COIL R165 1 211 977 11 METAL CHIP R166 1 2
84. 938 11 RES CHIP 56 5 1 16W R722 1 218 938 11 56 5 1 16W R1066 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R723 1 218 864 11 METAL CHIP 5 1K 05 1 10 R1067 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R1068 1 218 941 81 RES CHIP 100 5 1 16W R733 1 218 935 11 33 5 1 16W R811 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R812 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W RB101 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005X4 R816 1 218 937 11 47 5 1 16W RB102 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005X4 R817 1 218 935 11 33 5 1 16W RB103 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005X4 RB104 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005X4 R821 1 218 957 11 2 2K 5 1 16W RB105 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010X4 R823 1 218 931 11 RES CHIP 15 5 1 16W R825 1 218 939 11 RES CHIP 68 5 1 16W RB106 1 234 702 11 RES NETWORK 68 1005X4 R826 1 218 935 11 33 5 1 16W RB107 1 234 702 11 RES NETWORK 68 1005X4 R827 1 218 941 81 RES CHIP 100 5 1 16W RB108 1 234 702 11 RES NETWORK 68 1005X4 RB109 1 234 702 11 RES NETWORK 68 1005X4 RB110 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005X4 8 16 RD 060 POWER BLOCK Ref No Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks RB111 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005X4 RB601 1 234 381 21 RES NETWORK 100K 1005X4 RB112 1 242 963 21 RES NETWORK 33 1005 4 RB602 1 234 378 21 RES NETWORK 10K
85. 967 21 INDUCTOR 10uH L704 1 469 967 21 INDUCTOR 10uH R101 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 L803 1 414 743 21 INDUCTOR 47uH R111 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 114041 1 414 856 11 INDUCTOR 10uH R113 1 218 897 11 METAL CHIP 120K 0 5 1 10 R114 1 218 875 11 METAL CHIP 15K 05 1 10 IC LINK R115 1 218 869 11 METAL CHIP 8 2 05 1 10 APS102 1 576 570 21 FUSE MICRO 1608 TYPE 120 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 APS103 1 576 570 21 FUSE MICRO 1608 TYPE 121 1 218 885 11 METAL CHIP 39K 0 5 1 10 NPS602 1 576 570 21 FUSE MICRO 1608 TYPE R122 1 218 873 11 METAL CHIP 12K 05 1 10 R135 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 R137 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 Note The components identified by mark or dotted 8 6 line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified 103 Ref Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks 140 1 216 295 91 5 CHIP 0 R353 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10 142 1 216 295 91 5 0 R355 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W 8144 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 R362 1 216 829 11 METAL CHIP 4 7K 5 1 10W R145 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 EXCEPT HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 8146 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 R364 1 216 839 11 METAL CHIP 33K 5 1 10 R365 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10W R148 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 R154 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 R366 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 1K 5 1 10W R
86. AEP3 H 10V 10V C303 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 H 10V C304 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 H 10V C305 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 10V C308 1 164 874 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 10V C309 1 164 874 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 10V C310 1 164 874 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 10V C311 1 164 874 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 0312 1 164 874 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 10V C313 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 6 3V 0314 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 10V 0315 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 10V 0316 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 10V C317 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 0318 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 10V 0319 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 10V C320 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 10V 0321 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 16V 0322 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 50V 0323 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 50V 16V 0324 1 125 777 11 10 10V 6 3V 0325 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V C326 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 10V C327 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 16V C328 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 0329 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 6 3V 6 3V 16V 8 12 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 22uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 1uF 10uF 10uF 10uF 10uF 10uF 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 Remarks 16V 16V 16V 6 3V 16V 16V 16V 10V 6 3V X727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 6 3V X727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 6 3V X727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 6 3V X727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 6 3V
87. AU GND L2IN AU GND R2 IN s2sw lt lt lt Q702 705 SLICE 271 81715 0 705 0 0702 847 6327 50 6800 0 5 D R719 1600 17 0 5 R726 470 SYNCIN lt lt w R712 705 SVREF 0 5 T0 5 8 INSEL_PCONT 11701 R713 10k 0 5 41712 C709 R714 0701 BAS16 03W 0713 47u 16V R728 2 6 BS 19 R733 B R729 22k 0705 BC857CE6327 C731 C732 C719 B 729 iu B B SYNCRO DET Y4 VDETIFIL Ys GND SYNC SEP VSYNC V SYNC OUT SYNC OUT VDET1 IN HDET OUT VCC I2C F 0 4 8 5 8 TUSO TU_SDA 7 8 SCLOCK CN501 CR R GND V Y G 0707 711 BUFFER 0707 MSD601 RST1 G GND_V CB B GND_V RD 060 BOARD 5 7 4 33 VIDEOSY GND_V RECCCR H GND_V RECVY GND_V RECB GND_V RECG RECCCR RECVY L3B TO RD 060 BOARD 5 7 CN602 GND_V PAGE 4 33 RECR GND V FSW L3G L3RC FSW22 TO 5 8 7 8 3V REG R1720 10k SDATA GND I2C SYNC2 OUT VDET2 IN R761 4700 VDET2 OUT VDET2FIL Y CVBS Cy Cb OUT2 AGC IN AGC CTL C726 10 722 10 50
88. AU OUT R AW ee AINL 9 7 8 EU AU OUT L 21 AINR C214 7 5 AINR 10V AOUTR AUGND B SWA 8V ROUTRA AOUTR AOUTR AOUTR AOUTL AUGND AOUTR lt 0oUTR AOUTL AOUTL AOUTR lt lt RD 060 AOUTL 55 SWASV oa eo AOUTL x SPD_GND CN603 AOUTL lt lt 2 2 8 SPDIFO PAGE 4 34 515 gt XITRST5 212 ITSCK5 gt 5 5 SPDIFO lt lt ITREQ5 gt ITREQ5 175015 gt ITSDI5 10 ITSDO5 lt lt 9 175005 0 5 8 RISM_STATUS5_1 lt lt 8 RISM STATUS 5 1 RISM_STATUS5_2 lt lt 7 RISM STATUS 5_2 RISM_RTS_0 lt lt 6 RISM_RTS_0 D SWA12V gt C215 5 DGND 10 N 4 DGND SWASV 22 777 R224 AV fag NISE TX lt lt T 3 TX 2 0 5 ewe NISE Rx lt lt 2 RX 2 R225 1 DIAG 22k 4700 0 5 0 5 ANY ee R222 10k 5 0 5 gt AUGND 8 1 8 10V 1 8 gt gt gt 2 TO 3 8 6 8 7 8 AUDIO IN AV 103 2 8 4 7 4 8 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 AV 103 BOARD 3 8 NO MARK REC PB MODE
89. DADRSII1 Output of address 11 for SDRAM DWE Output of write enable signal VDD25 Power supply input Digital 2 5V 0 Input output of data 0 SDRAM 1 used VINAI Input of analog video CVBS VSSAADIOA Analog GND NC Not used VCCAADIOB Power supply input Analog 3 3V DAC ROUT PDO Output of analog video signal red 5 5 VSSADA10 Function Analog GND BOUT PD2 Output of analog video signal blue VSSADA10 Analog GND COUT PD3 Output of analog video signal chroma TESTMOD 2 Digital GND TESTMODI7 Digital GND TMS Input of SDI ICE JTAG TMS REC6560 0 Not used REC656 2 Input of digital video signal 2 REC656 4 Input of digital video signal 4 REC6560 5 Not used REC6560 6 Not used DADRS 1 O O O 91 Output of address 1 for SDRAM DBA 1 Output of bank address 1 for SDRAM VDD25 Power supply input Analog 2 5V DCS Output of chip select signal DCAS Output of CAS signal for SDRAM DCLKO Output of clock signal VSS Digital GND TD1 Not used VSSAADIOA Analog GND VINA2 Input of analog video signal Y VCCAADIOA Power supply input Analog 3 3V DAC CIN VINB1 Input of analog video signal C VSSAADIOB Anal
90. DECODER jack of the recorder gt The recorder is connected to the TV output jack of the connected equipment Synchro Recording does not complete The timer setting for the connected equipment overlapped the recorder s timer setting page 50 gt There was a power failure during the recording The recorder automatically starts recording when the satellite receiver is turned on The Synchro Rec function was activated Turn off the satellite receiver and cancel the Synchro Rec function page 49 You dubbed a title but the title did not appear in the HDD Title List gt The title contained a copy protection signal 50 it was moved page 73 High speed dubbing is not possible gt The title cannot be dubbed at high speed page 72 Even if erasure is performed so that a title does not contain mixed picture sizes it is still treated as a title with mixed picture sizes The angles cannot be changed Multi angles are not recorded on the DVD VIDEO being played gt You are trying to change the angles when does not appear on the TV screen page 52 The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing angles Try changing the angle using the DVD VIDEO s menu The angles cannot be changed for the titles recorded on this recorder The angles cannot be changed during slow motion playback or when playback is paused 1 11 1 1 The DivX video files do not play The file is not cr
91. ENTER if the IN point is correct If the IN point is incorrect select the IN point using and press ENTER The display for setting the end point OUT appears Combining multiple Playlist titles Combine 1 Press TITLE LIST If the Title List Original menu appears press Press OPTIONS to select Combine and press ENTER The display for selecting titles appears 3 Select a title and press ENTER A number indicating the order in which you selected the title appears To cancel the selection press ENTER HDD again 4 Repeat step 3 to select all of the titles you want to combine To cancel all of the selections select Reset 5 Select OK and press ENTER The list of titles to be combined appears To change the selection select Change and go to step 3 Combine Combino the tiles Inthe following order Mon 25 9 Ouen Mon 256 6 Select OK and press ENTER The titles are combined 7 selectthe OUT point using lt lt gt gt and press ENTER Playback pauses 8 Press ENTER if the OUT point is correct If the OUT point is incorrect select the OUT point using and press ENTER The selected scene is added to the scene list To add more scenes go to step 5 9 When you finish adding scenes press Greate a Playlist___ 1 World Sports 21
92. HQ Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 10min 10 min 8 min 8 min 25min High High DVD R speed speed Double DVD R DVD R Layer HSP Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 6min 6min 5min 5min 16min 40 sec 40 sec 40 sec SP Approx Approx Approx Approx 5min 5min 3min 3min 12min 45 sec 45 sec 30 sec LSP Approx Approx Approx Approx 4min 4min 3min 3min 10min ESP Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 3min 3min 2min 2min 8 20 sec 20 sec 30 sec 30 sec 20 sec LP Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 2 min 2min 2 min 2 min 6 30 sec 30 sec 15 sec EP Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx lmin 60 1 min 60 60 3 40 sec 3 15 sec 3 min SLP Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 60 56 60 60 15 sec 3 min 1 The values in the above table are for reference only Actual times for dubbing also require time for creating disc s control information and other data 2 This is the maximum recording speed of this recorder The recording speed cannot exceed the value indicated in the above table even when using discs that support higher recording speeds In addition depending on the disc condition the recorder may be unable to record at the maximum recording speed indicated in the table 3 High speed dubbing is not
93. If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2 IN jacks select L2 in the front panel display by pressing PROG or INPUT SELECT If the equipment is connected to the LINE 3 DECODER jack select L3 in the front panel display by pressing PROG 4 or INPUT SELECT If the equipment is connected to the DV IN jack this is usually for a digital video camera connection select DV in the front panel display by pressing INPUT SELECT The playback picture or TV programme from the equipment connected through the recorder is distorted gt If the playback picture output from DVD player VCR or tuner goes through your recorder before reaching your TV the copy protection signal applied to some programmes could affect picture quality Disconnect the playback equipment in question and connect it directly to your TV The picture does not fill the screen Set TV Type of the Video Output in the Video setup in accordance with the screen size of your TV page 88 The picture does not fill the screen even though the picture size is set in TV Type of the Video Output in the Video setup gt The picture size of the title is fixed The picture is black and white gt Check that Linel Output of the Scart Setting in the Video setup is set to the appropriate item that conforms to your system page 89 If you are using a SCART cord be sure to use one tha
94. Line1 Output To output video signals select Video To output S video signals select S Video To output RGB signals select RGB Select Video to enjoy the SMARTLINK features If you set Easy Setup Component Out to On you cannot select RGB If you set Easy Setup Line3 Input to Yes you cannot select S Video Easy Setup Audio Connection If you connected an AV amplifier receiver using a coaxial cord select Yes DIGITAL OUT and set the digital output signal page 91 3 Press ENTER when Finish appears Easy Setup is finished To return to the previous step Press d gt RETURN X Hints If your AV amplifier receiver has an MPEG audio decoder set MPEG to MPEG age 91 you want to run Easy Setup again select Easy Setup from SETUP in the System Menu page 97 Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder If the equipment has an S video jack you can use an S video cord instead of an audio video cord S VIDEO VIDEO d S video cord not supplied to LINE 2 IN 06000 VCR etc AUDIO 4 L Audio video cord not supplied Connecting a VCR or Similar Device After disconnecting the recorder s mains lead from the mains connect
95. OUT 0 SYNCIN i 9 AR N3 AUXRIN FS L1 QUT 1 19 10MHz DAL IN L1LOUT SYNC 6 DAR IN AUX OUT 62 HDET 1 12606 1 AUX LOUT SYNCRO DET XP VMUTE ITXRST 06 our BSI T INB 601 AMUTE P FAIL DET 0611 0615 525 725 727 925 AVLINK OUT 67 AVLINK 4 BUFFER i AVLINK IN LED STB TUAUTOP um 161102 AUTO PRESET LED XRESET 1 TUG SIRCSIN LEDRST X1101 FLD DATA UU s WEN LED DIM XCE 54 NOT USE PHE BS BST CONT DIMMER 3 FLD STB Bs BIT SW FLD STB 101103 ps en KEY2 i at 1 1 T
96. Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment Finalise ELUB SS ET Finalising is necessary when you play discs recorded with this recorder on other DVD equipment When you finalise a DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R or DVD R Video mode a DVD menu will be automatically created which can be displayed on other DVD equipment Before finalising check the differences between the disc types in the table below 1 Disc Information Differences between the disc types Mego joven a Discs automatically finalised Dac Name RW when removed from the recorder pee enama neo However you may need to finalise Orginal 37 the diss for DVD ESP inu equipment or if the recording time Remainder 257 T Br quipment Cem is short You can edit or record on the disc even after finalising On Off Indicates whether Finalising is unnecessary when protection is set DVD RW DVD playing a disc on VR format R in VR mode only compatible equipment Even if your other DVD equipment 2 Protect Disc is VR format compatible you may m need to finalise the disc especially select Protect Disc and press if the recording time is short You ENTER can edit or record on the disc even 5 after fi
97. Press PROG to select the 15 Select On using 4 and press For DVD RW discs programme position or input source ENTER DVD RWS are formatted in the you want to record recording format VR mode or Video 3 mode set by Format DVD RW in Press REC MODE repeatedly to select To return to the previous step the DVD setup Press RETURN 2 ach time you press the button the For DVD R discs E display on the TV screen changes as DVD Rsare automatically formatted in Note follows If you disconnect the recorder s mains lead you Video mode unused 5 8 18 TO is r gt HQ SP will not be able to view signals from the DVD R VR mode format the dise connected decoder using the Disc Information display L_ SLP EP LP ESP page 38 before youlmake For more details about the recording recording If the disc is recordable on this recorder mode soe page you can manually re format the disc to make a blank disc page 38 continued vJ 28 30 4 Press REC Recording starts Recording stops automatically after 8 hours of continuous recording or when the HDD or DVD is full To stop recording Press REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for recorder to stop recording To watch another TV programme while recording If your TV is connected to th
98. Remote commander remote 1 R6 size AA batteries 2 Specifications and design are subject to change without notice Compatible colour systems This recorder is designed to record using the PAL colour system and play back using the PAL or NTSC colour systems For French RDR HX520 and RDR HX920 models only The signals of the SECAM colour system can be received or recorded but played back in the PAL colour system only Recording of video sources based on other colour systems cannot be guaranteed About i LINK The DV IN jack on this recorder is i LINK compliant for digital video cameras This section describes the i LINK standard and its features What is i LINK i LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video digital audio and other data in two directions between equipment having the i LINK jack and for controlling other equipment i LINK compatible equipment can be connected by a single i LINK cable Possible applications are operations and data transactions with various digital equipment When two or more i LINK compatible equipment are connected to this recorder in a daisy chain operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that this recorder is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected equipment Note however that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the characteristics and speci tions of the equipment to be co
99. TV jack LINE 3 DECODER jack DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL jack only when Dolby Digital is set to D PCM page 91 Standard Normally select this position TV Makes low sounds clear even if you turn the volume down Wide Gives you the feeling of Range being at a live performance Downmix DVDs only Switches the method for mixing down to two channels when you play a DVD which has rear sound elements channels or is recorded in Dolby Digital format For details on the rear signal components see 4 Displaying the Playing Remaining Time and Play Information on page 31 This function affects the output of the following jacks LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks LINE 1 TV jack LINE 3 DECODER jack DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL jack when Dolby Digital is set to D PCM page 91 Dolby Normally select this position Surround Multi channel audio signals are output to two channels for enjoying surround sounds Normal Multi channel audio signals are downmixed to two channels for use with your stereo Disc Settings DVD The DVD setup allows you to adjust parental control language and other DVD related settings 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode Select SETUP and press ENTER Select DVD and press ENTER The DVD setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined amp seue Tae
100. VDEC 3 3V REG TK73400AU3G0L C D R101 05 gt UNSW6V T 6 rows 2 GND T R148 CN102 0 XRMUTE 1 HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 Ux a XLMUTE 2 gt SW5V S swsv 3 i 1 gt GND T T rot I RD 060 UNSWAV 4 T 41714 5 GND I BOARD 5 7 VDEC3 3V 5 W R114 UNSW3V 6 49 i e e e ease Medo AC E ATUS 4 33 1200 _ 0 5 gt gt ew gt 8 tows 0 SR 7 B D101 GND 8 2105031 12 Spy 2 Ot JL130 C123 9 lt A 25V C106 C120 C119 C118 Q101 Bn 10u iu lu 0 01 R115 MUN2213T1 10V 63V B B B x 0 596 SWITCH ed 25V 25V HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 H727 AEP3 LP101 LP102 LP104 LP106 4 5 HX920 HX925 Note The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified 4 6 POWER AV 103 1 8 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 AV 103 BOARD 2 8 NO MARK REC PB MODE AUDIO IN C213 A R218 R223 108 22k 10k 10V CN502 27P x 0 596 0 5 FE EU
101. a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack i LINK jack page 77 For details refer to the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment To record this recorder see Recording from connected equipment without a timer on page 51 sGumas pue sdnyooy Connecting to the LINE 3 DECODER jack Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 3 DECODER jack of this recorder VCR TV 000 cord supplied 4 to SCART input to G LINE 1 TV to G LINE 3 DECODER San 5 T 5 ats Notes Pictures containing protection signals that prohibit copying cannot recorded If you pass the recorder signals through a VCR you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen Be sure to connect your VCR to the DVD recorder and to your in order shown below watch video tapes watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV DVD recorder VCR Line input 1 VCR DVD recorder TV The SMARTLINK features are not available for devices connected via the DVD recorder s LINE 3 DECODER jack When you record to a VCR from this DVD recorder do not switch the input source to TV
102. a disc New discs automatically formatted when inserted If necessary you can manually re format a DVD RW or DVD RW disc to make a blank disc For DVD RWs you select a recording format VR mode or Video mode according to your needs page 63 ENTER 1 insert a disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 27 2 Press OPTIONS to select Disc Information and press ENTER Example When a DVD RW is inserted Disc Information l wem Diss Disc Name DESI Title 3 SP 116001 f Fema Remainder 3HOOM SLP 4HOOM 214 700 3 Select Format and press ENTER 4 Select OK and press ENTER For DVD RWs and unrecorded DVD Rs Video mode select VR or Video and press ENTER All contents on the disc are erased 1 9 Finalising is necessary when playing on any equipment other than this recorder After finalising you cannot edit or record on the disc ET lt gt OPTIONS Finalising the disc using amp open close button 1 Make a recording See 2 Recording a Programme page 27 2 Press open close The display shows the approximate time required for finalising and asks for confirmation For DVD RWs the recorder automatically starts finalisin
103. channel manually in Channel Setting in the Basic setup page 83 gt Select the correct source using the INPUT SELECT button or select a channel of any TV programme using the PROG 4 buttons TV programme pictures are distorted gt Reorient the TV aerial gt Adjust the picture see the TV s instruction manual Place the recorder and TV farther apart Place the TV and any bunched aerial cables farther apart The aerial cable is connected to the AERIAL OUT jack on the recorder Connect the cable to the AERIAL IN jack 1 24 Easy Setup Resetting the Recorder Select this to run the Easy Setup programme 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select SETUP and press ENTER 3 Select Easy Setup and press ENTER amp Basie Video Aude Recording DVD Ey 4 Select Start 5 Follow the instructions for Easy Setup page 20 from step 2 siu unsnlpv pue 97 TV channels cannot changed The channel is disabled page 84 A timer recording started which changed the channels The picture from equipment connected to the recorder s input jack does not appear on the screen gt If the equipment is connected to the LINE 1 TV jack select L1 in the front panel display by pressing PROG 4 or INPUT SELECT
104. chapters at approximately 6 minute intervals To automatically adjust the dubbing mode If there is not enough available space on the target disc the recorder automatically selects a dubbing mode with lower picture quality according to the available space The same dubbing mode is set for all of the titles If disc space is insufficient for the selected dubbing mode the following display appears after step 12 DV Dubbing There is not enough memory The dubbing mode will be adjusted Do you want to continue Select OK and go to step 12 If you do not want to change the dubbing mode select Cancel However note that dubbing will end before the programme is finished Notes If you set the beginning of the tape as the IN point and the end point as the OUT point the IN and OUT points may move slightly during dubbing You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one second 1 Follow steps 1 to 6 of Preparing for DV dubbing on page 77 and press SYSTEM MENU 2 Select DV EDIT and press ENTER The display asks if you want to start selecting scenes Scene Selection Do you want to select a scene If you have previously saved a programme the display asks if you want to edit an existing programme or to create a new programme To resume editing the existing programme select Saved Data and go to step 9 3 Select Start and press ENTER The display for sett
105. details see Progressive Output on page 88 gt 13 Step 3 Connecting the Audio Cords Select of the following patterns according to the input jack on your TV monitor projector or AV amplifier receiver This will enable you to listen to sound Speakers Speakers Rear L d AV amplifier receiver with a decoder 0 Rear Q mE Front R Front 1 BH d cem ou 4 w to DIGITAL OUT pue Subwoofer to coaxial digital input Coaxial digital cord not supplied COAXIAL T WES Audio video yellow A Signal flow The yellow plug is used for video signals page 13 Digital audio input jack mplifier receiver has aDolby ital DTS or MPEG audio decoder and digital input jack use this connection You can enjoy Dolby Digital 5 1 DTS 5 1ch and MPEG audio 5 1ch surround effects not supplied recorder to LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L cord yellow i 1 projector amplifier receiver Audio L R left right input jacks This connection will use your TV s or stereo amplifier s receiver s two speakers for sound Hint For correct speaker locatio
106. disc space is insufficient for the selected dubbing mode the following display appears after step 9 of Dubbing multiple titles Dub Selected Titles on page 75 Dub Selected Titles There is not enough memory The dubbing mode will be adjusted Do you want to continue OK Cancel Select OK and go to step 9 To manually select another dubbing mode select Cancel and go to step 8 73 gt 75 76 78 stop dubbing Press OPTIONS to select Stop Dubbing and press ENTER When asked for confirmation select OK and press ENTER When dubbing Move is stopped partway no part of the title will be moved to the dubbing target However note that this will decrease the free disc space for DVD Rs DVD Rs Hint You can turn off the recorder during dubbing The recorder completes dubbing even after being turned off 3 Press INPUT SELECT on the remote repeatedly to select DV The front panel display changes as follows programme position t 4 Press REC MODE on the remote repeatedly to select the recording mode The recording mode changes as follows L1 L2 L3 DV HSP SP LSP lt LP Esp For details about the recording mode see page 40 5 Press OPTIONS on the remote to select DV Audio Input
107. disc or a timer recording starts while editing DVD discs created by DVD video cameras cannot be edited on this recorder audio tracks JPEG image files or DivX video files that the recorder can play The recorder can play the following tracks and files MP3 audio tracks with the extension mp3 JPEG image files with the extension jpeg or jpg image files that conform to the DCF image file format DivX video file with the extension avi or divx Design rule for Camera File system Image standards for digital cameras regulated by JEITA and Information Technology Notes The recorder will play any data with the extension mp3 jpeg ji avi or divx even if they are not in MP3 JPEG or DivX format Playing these data may generate a loud noise which could damage your speaker system The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in mp3PRO format The recorder may not play a DivX video file when the file has been combined from two or more DivX video files Depending on the disc normal playback may not be possible For example the picture may be unclear playback may not appear smooth the sound may skip and so on Depending on the disc playback may take some time to start Some files cannot be played The letters that cannot be displayed are replaced with yaeqheld gt 61
108. for DATA DVDs or DATA CDs For CDs with CD text press TIME TEXT 12 Playing time remaining 2 Displays Super VIDEO CDs as SVCD DATA CDs as CD and DATA DVDs as DVD 2 Does not appear with VIDEO CDs DATA DVDs and DATA CDs 3 Displayed when you press TIME TEXT repeatedly 5 Changing the Name of a Recorded Programme HDD ELD 075 Emm ES You can label a DVD title or programme entering characters You can enter up to 64 characters for a title or disc name but the actual number of characters displayed in the menus such as the Title List will vary The steps below explain how to change the name of the recorded programme Number 5 buttons Press TITLE LIST 2 Select a title and press ENTER sub menu appears 3 Select Title Name and press ENTER The display for entering characters appears 4 Press 14141 9 to move the cursor to the right of the display and select A upper case a lower case or Symbol and press ENTER The characters for the selected type are displayed 5 Press lt 4 gt to select the character you want to enter and press ENTER The selected character appears at the top of the display Hints If DTS is set to Off in the Audio setup the DTS track selection option will not appear on the screen even if the disc contains DTS tracks page 91
109. has performed the self diagnosis function gt Contact your nearest Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility and give the five character service number Example E 61 10 Inputs and outputs LINE 2 OUT AUDIO Phono jack 2 Vrms 10 kilohms VIDEO Phono jack 1 0 Vp p S VIDEO 4 pin mini DIN Y 1 0 Vp p C 0 3 Vp p PAL LINE 2 IN AUDIO Phono jack 2 Vrms more than 22 kilohms VIDEO Phono jack 1 0 Vp p S VIDEO 4 pin mini DIN Y 1 0 Vp p C 0 3 Vp p PAL LINE 1 TV 21 pin CVBS IN OUT S Video RGB OUT upstream LINE 3 DECODER 21 pin CVBS IN OUT S Video RGB IN RGB signals cannot be recorded except with French RDR HX520 and RDR HX920 models S Video OUT downstream Decoder DV IN 4 pin i LINK S100 DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL Phono jack 0 5 Vp p 75 ohms COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y Pr Cr Phono jack Y 1 0 Vp p 0 7 Vp p Pr Cr 0 7 Vp p General Power requirements 220 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Power consumption RDR HX520 42 W RDR HX720 HX722 HX920 44 W Dimensions 430 65 x 328 mm width height depth incl projecting parts Hard disk drive capacity RDR HX520 80 GB RDR HX720 HX722 160 GB RDR HX920 250 Mass 4 2 kg Operating temperature 5 C to 35 C Operating humidity 25 to 80 Notes About This Recorder On operation the recorder is brought directly from a cold to a warm location or is p
110. input selector on your so that the signal from the recorder appears on your TV screen The initial settings message appears If this message does not appear select Easy Setup from SETUP in the System Menu Settings and Adjustments on page 83 2 Press ENTER Follow the on screen instructions to make the following settings Easy Setup OSD Select a language for the on screen displays Easy Setup Tuner System Select your country region or language The programme position order will be set according to the country region you set To set the programme positions manually see page 83 If youlivein a French speaking country that is not listed on the display select ELSE English Easy Setup Clock The recorder will automatically search foraclock signal If a clock signal cannot be found set the clock manually using 44 gt and press ENTER Easy Setup TV Type page 88 If you have a wide screen TV select 16 9 If you have a standard select either 4 3 Letter Box shrink to fit or 4 3 Pan Scan stretch to fit This will determine how wide screen images are displayed on your TV Easy Setup Component Out If you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jack select On Easy Setup Line3 Input If you plan to connect a decoder such as a PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder to the LINE 3 DECODER jack select Yes Easy Setup
111. manually in the steps below Select an available TV system page 84 lt and change the settings using 4 BG Select this when in West European countries except those listed in Receivable channels on page 84 DK Select this when in East European countries Select this when Great Britain Ireland Select this when France L is only available with French RDR HX520 and RDR HX920 models sjueunsnpy pue gt 83 Channel Press 4 4 repeatedly until the programme position you want is displayed The programme positions are scanned in the order shown in the table below If you know the number of the programme position you want press the number buttons For example for programme position 5 first press 0 and then press us To disable a programme position enter 00 The disabled programme positions will be skipped when you press PROG To select a cable or satellite programme position press 4 4 until the programme position you want is displayed Name Changes or enters a new station name up to 5 characters The recorder must receive programme position information for instance SMARTLINK information for station names to appear automatically pn Staton Name e C enter characters see page 34 PAY TV CANAL Sets the PAY TV Canal Pl
112. of digital audio signal VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND DDATA 21 Input output of data 21 for SDRAM DDATA 28 Input output of data 28 for SDRAM DDATA 29 Input output of data 29 for SDRAM DDATA 22 Input output of data 22 for SDRAM DDATA 23 Input output of data 23 for SDRAM ADCCLKI Not used LRCKO Output of audio L R clock signal Output of digital audio signal A0BCKI Input of audio bit clock signal VDD Power supply input Digital 3 3V VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND DDATA 18 Input output of data 18 for SDRAM DDATA 26 Input output of data 26 for SDRAM DDATA 27 Input output of data 27 for SDRAM DDATA 19 Input output of data 19 for SDRAM DDATA 20 Input output of data 20 for SDRAM SPDIFO Input of digital audio signal Input of clock signal 27MHz Video decoder BCKO Output of audio bit clock signal AMCLK2 Input of audio master clock 33 8688MHz VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND VSS Digital GND 5 10 VSS Function
113. of the component video conforms to the PAL standard If this signal level is not correct color of the video signal will have different color when the connector output signal is connected to having COMPONENT input Mode PLAY Signal Color bars Test point D1 D2 VIDEO OUTPUT connector pin 9 terminated in 750 Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 1 0 V 0 07Vp p Check method 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the signal level is 1 0 0 07 Vp p 1 0 0 07Vp p Fig 7 4 7 2 PLAY Signal Color bars Test point D1 D2 VIDEO OUTPUT connector pin 9 terminated 750 Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 700 mV 50 mVp p Check method 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the burst signal level is 700 mV 50 mVp p P 700 50 Fig 7 6 8 1 5 XX X mean standardized parts so they may have some differences from the original one Items marked are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items 8 1 1 OVERALL SECTION lt 4 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 SECTION 8 REPAIR PARTS LIST The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded
114. on DVD RWs DVD Rs mode that record both the main and sub sounds Main Records the main sound for the bilingual programme Sub Records the sub sound for the bilingual programme Timer Settings Rec Mode Adjust On Automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded page 43 Off Turns off the function Auto Title Erase HDD only On Automatically erases old titles recorded on the HDD page 43 Off Turns off the function TV Direct HDD DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DVD R only On Allows you to easily record what you are watching on the TV using SMARTLINK Off Turns off the TV Direct Rec function 5 Select Level and press ENTER The selection items for Level are displayed DVD Parental eval Standard Password The lower the value the stricter the limitation Discs rated higher than the selected level will be restricted 6 Select the level and press ENTER The Parental Control setting is complete To cancel the Parental Control setting for the disc set Level to Off in step 6 To change the password select Password in step 3 and press ENTER When the display for registering a password appears enter a new four digit password using the number buttons then select OK and press ENTER Notes If you forget your password you will have to rese
115. on another recorder 21529 14613 D E a 8 5 s lt lt s s 2 continued 9 91888 14011 GAG 0 40 42 Timer Recording Before Recording Before you start recording Check that the disc has enough available space for the recording page 33 For the HDD DVD RWs and DVD RWs you can free up disc space by erasing titles page 64 Adjust the recording picture quality and picture size if necessary page 46 6 Hint Timer recordings will be made regardless whether or not the recorder is turned on You can turn off the recorder without affecting the recording even after recording starts Note To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment finalise the disc page 36 Like the standard x3 recording modes of video tapes you can select the desired recording mode using the REC MODE button Recording modes with higher quality provide a more beautiful recording but the large data volume also results in a shorter recording time Conversely a longer duration provides longer recording time but the lower data volume results in a coarser picture quality Timer Recording Standard ShowView HDD EE GD Gu EN ES ES You can set the timer for a total of 40 programmes 8 programmes when using the PDC VPS function up to 30 days in advance There are two meth
116. positions 4 to 99 press t4 repeatedly 822 825 523 526 315 25 323 25 S24 827 323 25 331 25 gt 85 2 Selectthe programme position for which Notes Hint you want to set or change the TV guide page using PROG or number buttons The TV guide page numbers Example P301 appear automatically when the recorder detects them Basic TV Guide Page Prog P302 P303 P304 P305 P306 P307 If no page numbers are detected you have to set the appropriate TV guide page number manually Poo 3 Select the TV guide page number you want to modify and press ENTER Basic Guide Page Prog B 7 P306 4 Press the number buttons or 4 4 gt to enter guide page number and press ENTER to confirm the setting If you make a mistake re enter the correct number To return to the original settings press RETURN 5 Tosetor change another TV guide page number repeat steps 3 and 4 above XY Hint To view Teletext information on your TV screen during a broadcast switch to your TV s tuner by pressing TV DVD In step 4 above enter 000 if you do not want to use the TV guide page number for automatic labelling The recorder will instead store a default title name programme position start time stop time Refer to the Teletext information on your TV screen to obtain the TV guide page number with
117. recorder and TV set the TV to the recorder s programme position and display the Title List menu with one touch of the TITLE LIST button page 53 One Touch Timer You can turn on the recorder and TV set the TV to the recorder s programme position and display the timer programming menu with one touch of the TIMER button page 44 Automatic Power Off The recorder will turn off automatically if the recorder is not used after you turn off the TV NexTView Download You can easily set the timer by using the NexTView Download function on your TV See your TV s instruction manual 1 MEGALOGIC is a registered trademark of Grundig Corporation 72 EASYLINK and CINEMALINK are trademarks of Philips Corporation Q Link and NexTView Link are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation 4 EURO VIEW LINK is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation 55 T V LINK is a trademark of JVC Corporation Hint SMARTLINK also works with TVs or other equipment having EPG Timer Control EPG Title Download and Now Recording functions For details refer to the operating instructions supplied with your TV or other equipment Notes The SMARTLINK features are available only when Video is selected in Linel Output The SMARTLINK features are not available while the power is off when Power save standby is set to On page 96 Not all TVs respond to the functions above Step 2 Connecting
118. repeat from step 3 6 Select and press ENTER The titles are erased To erase all titles on the disc You can reformat the HDD DVD RW or DVD RW to make the disc or drive blank To format the HDD see Format on page 96 To formata DVD RW or DVD RW disc see 8 Reformatting a disc on page 38 pue Erasing a section of a title A B Erase HDD GL You can select a section scene in a title and erase it Note that erasing scenes in a title cannot be undone 1 After step 2 of Erasing and Editing a Title select A B Erase and press ENTER The display for setting point A appears The title starts to play return to the beginning of the title press M and then press Erase Set point A 1 World Sports 00002 Selecta poin Playback point 2 Select point using 4 and press ENTER Playback pauses continued 65 Creating and Editing Playlist HDD Playlist allows you to re edit without changing the actual recordings You can create up to 97 Playlist titles Example You have recorded the final few matches of a football tournament on a DVD RW DVD R VR mode You want to create a digest with the goal scenes and other highlights but you also want to keep the original recording Original this case you compile h
119. that were installed during a previous repair Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement 4 Look for parts which through functioning show obvious signs of deterioration Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement 5 Check the B voltage to see it is at the values specified 6 Flexible Circuit Board Repairing Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270 during repairing Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board within 3 times Becareful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering or unsoldering TABLE CONTENTS SERVICE NOTE 1 DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY CANNOT EJECTED FORCED EJECTION 5 1 GENERAL WARNING 1 1 Precautions 22 Quick Guide to Disc 1 2 Hookups and Settings VEET OIA IREA E IEE T 1 3 Hooking Up the Recorders 2 1 3 Step 1 Connecting the Aerial Cable 1 3 Step 2 Connecting Video Cords 1 3 Step 3 Connecting the Audio Cords ve 1 3 Step 4 Connecting the Mains Lead MI 1 4 Step 5 Preparing the Remote HH 1 4 Step 6 Easy Setup Hem ee nnne 1 5 Connecting a or Similar Device M 1 5 Connecting to a Satellite or Digital Tuner 1 5 Connecting a PAY TV Canal Plus Analogue Decoder 1 6 Eight Basic Operations Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder erroe
120. the instruction manuals for the equipment to be connected Required i LINK cable Use the Sony i LINK 4 pin to 4 pin cable during DV dubbing i LINK and L are trademarks Front panel O 17 VC on standby button 20 Front panel display 111 Disc tray 27 amp open close button 27 TIMER indicator 42 SYNCHRO indicator 49 play button 52 W stop button 52 remote sensor 17 REC button 27 10 REC STOP button 27 e eo N 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 H1 SS or 16 5 14 1312 11 HDD button indicator 27 DVD button indicator 27 12 amp DV IN jack 77 13 ONE TOUCH DUB button 79 14 PROGRAM buttons 27 The button has a tactile dot 15 INPUT SELECT button 49 77 16 REC MODE button 27 17 LINE 2 IN S VIDEO VIDEO L MONO AUDIO jacks 22 Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating the recorder 1 27 Guide to Parts and Controls For more information see the pages in parentheses Remote 10 TV DVD button 17 11 TOP MENU button 52 12 CHAPTER MARK button 67 CHAPTER MARK ERASE button 67 13 SYSTEM MENU button 80 83 TITLE LIST button 29 52 64 TIMER button 42 44
121. the recorder during recording the recorder continues to record until the time counter runs out Note that the Quick Timer function does not work if TV Direct Rec is set to On in the Recording setup page 93 To cancel the Quick Timer Press REC repeatedly until the counter appears in the front panel display The recorder returns to normal recording mode Tcontinued 45 Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings Timer List HDD EI You can check change or cancel timer settings using the Timer List TIMER LIST JT ott ENTER d gt RETURN e lt LE 1 Press LIST The Timer List appears Timer ust 1020 8 S Mo Sa 72200 7215 sP Sat 2511 2030 7130 DEF S Si Sat 2811 2100 2200 GHI 90 2611 1600 1700 DEF Timer information displays the recording date time recording mode etc cH Indicates that the setting is overlapped by another setting ted Indicates the setting is currently being recorded Indicates that the timer recording cannot be recorded as set such as for a timer recording that cannot be recorded in the selected Rec mode Tcontinued 47 Indicates setting is being recorded to the HDD Indicates the setting is being recorded to a DVD When all of the timer settings do not fit on the list the scroll bar appears To
122. through an external tuner not supplied may contain copy protection signals copy guard function and as such may not be recordable depending on the type of signal IMPORTANT NOTICE Caution This recorder is capable of holding a still video image or on screen display image on your television screen indefinitely If you leave the still video image or on screen display image displayed on your TV for an extended period of time you risk permanent damage to your television screen Plasma display panels and projection televisions are especially susceptible to this If you have any questions or problems concerning your recorder please consult your nearest Sony deal gt 3 10 Quick Guide to Disc Types Recordable and playable discs Hard disk drive Formatting Dub HDD contentstoa DVD internal unnecessary to play on other DVD players formattedin Playable DVD RW DVD ReWritable mode compatible players DVD RW patible i DVD RW automatically finalised E DVD ReWritape Playable only VR mode VR DYD Format in VR mode mode page 27 Compatible players finalisation unnecessary RW DVD Video Format in Playable on most DVD Video mode players finalisation page 27 necessary page 36 DVD R Automatically formatted in Playable on most DVD VR mode players f
123. tuF 10 C634 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 16 C322 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 C635 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 16V HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 C639 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 C324 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP uF 10 C325 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5 50V 8 3 103 Description C641 1 107 826 11 CHIP C642 1 126 947 11 ELECT C646 1 162 963 11 CHIP C649 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C650 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C651 1 126 926 11 ELECT C652 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C655 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C656 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C657 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C701 1 126 947 11 ELECT C702 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C703 1 107 726 91 CERAMIC CHIP C704 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C705 1 125 837 91 CERAMIC CHIP C706 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C707 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C708 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C709 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C710 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C711 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C712 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C713 1 107 696 91 ELECT C714 1 126 947 11 ELECT C715 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C716 1 126 947 11 ELECT C717 1 126 947 11 ELECT C718 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C719 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C720 1 126 947 11 ELECT C721 1 126 947 11 ELECT C722 1 126 964 11 ELECT C723 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C724 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C725 1 107 826 11 CERA
124. well before connecting Hint If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after the initial dub use the DV IN jack and record a DVD RW DVD R VR mode or HDD Recording an Entire DV Format Tape One Touch Dubbing HDD EXIT Gs ET You can record the entire contents of a DV Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single press of the ONE TOUCH DUB button on the recorder The recorder controls the digital video camera for the whole process and completes the recording How chapters are created The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD become a single title When Auto Chapter is set to in the Recording setup this title is divided into chapters When dubbing to the HDD or a DVD RW DVD R VR mode each shooting session on the tape becomes a chapter on the disc For other discs the recorder divides the title into chapters at approximately 6 minute intervals Follow steps 1 to 6 of Preparing for DV dubbing on page 77 and press ONE TOUCH DUB on the recorder The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts recording the tape contents When the recording is finished the recorder rewinds the tape in the digital video camera To stop during recording Press B REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording Hints If you set Finalise Disc of One Touch Dubbing to Auto in the DVD setup page 95 the recorded dise except DVD R
125. 08 M Travel 10 Mystery Extended Title List I 2 254 Mon 10 4 Sun 24 Tha 353 Tue 783 Sat 25 3 Mon 20 3 Wed 15 3 Sun 123 1 Disc type Displays the media type HDD or DVD Also displays the title type Original or Playlist for HDD or DVD RW DVD R VR mode disc titles e 5 2 E 9 D 5 5 s lt lt s S s Disc space remainder total Title information Displays the title number title name and recording date Title size is shown the Thumbnail title list red Indicates that the title is currently being recorded Indicates that the title is currently being dubbed Indicates the protected title NEW or N Indicates that the title is newly recorded not played back HDD only Indicates titles containing Copy Once copy protection signals HDD only page 73 4 Scroll bar Appears when all of the titles do not fit on the list To view the hidden titles press 5 Title s thumbnail picture The still images for each title are displayed gt I 4 Displaying the Playing Remaining Time and Play Information HDD EIU am ET 1972 DATA You check playing time and remaining time of the current title chapt
126. 1 603 M306H5MG A13FP M306H5MC C33FP 306 5 AV 103 BOARD 5 1 5 2 MAIN CONTROL IC 1 103 R8A34012BG RD 060 BOARD 5 4 6 SERVICE MODE 6i Check aHa eb 6 1 6 2 Screen Transition in the Service Mode 6 2 6 3 Items and Description of Service Mode Menu 6 3 6 4 Device Check Menu Diagnostic Test 6 3 6 5 Hard Disk Check 6 4 7 ADJUSTMENT 7 1 Video System Adjustment eere eee 7 1 8 REPAIR PARTS LIST 8 1 EXPLODED VIEWS 8 1 1 OVERALL SECTION esas sa Rasa sau aN 8 1 8 1 2 CHASSIS SECTION 8 2 ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST naa 8 3 SERVICE NOTE 1 DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY CANNOT BE EJECTED FORCED EJECTION 1 Remove case block assembly 2 Insert the stiff wire in hole and eject the tray lt 5 Open the tray ERS Ne 2 NOTES DURING THE FORCED EJECTION 1 If the forced ejection is executed while a blank disc media DVD RW R exists on the tray Insert DVD ROM DVD test disc DVD software available on the market or the like in the tray and then close the tray Note1 If you close the tray while it is empty ejection of the tray becomes impossible Note2 If you close the tray with a CD disc inserted in it the CD can be ejected However if you close the tray while it is empty there can be a case that ejection of the tray becomes impossible Note3 Even if you replace the DVD drive unit while the tray remain
127. 1 11 680 5 1 16W R613 1 218 990 81 5 0 313 1 218 990 81 5 0 14 1 218 951 11 RES CHIP 680 5 1 16W HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 14 1 218 977 11 RES CHIP 100 5 1 16W R615 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 16 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R315 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W R617 1 218 951 11 RES CHIP 680 5 1 16 520 725 727 920 925 R618 1 218 951 11 RES CHIP 680 5 1 16W R316 1 218 941 81 RES CHIP 100 5 1 16W R619 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R317 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W R620 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R621 1 218 951 11 680 5 1 16W R623 1 218 978 11 RES CHIP 120K 5 1 16W R624 1 208 940 81 METAL CHIP 160K 0 5 1 16 R625 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 8 15 RD 060 Ref No Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks R626 1 208 713 11 METAL CHIP 18K 05 1 46W R836 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 27 1 208 911 11 METAL 10 05 1 16 EXCEPT HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R628 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 R839 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R635 1 218 961 11 4 7K 5 1 16W R840 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R638 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R841 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R842 1 218 990 8
128. 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP EXCEPT HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R828 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP R683 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 520 725 727 920 925 R835 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R836 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R685 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 R837 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP R686 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 R838 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP R692 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 1 10 R839 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 693 1 216 825 11 METAL 2 2K 5 1 10 697 1 216 833 11 METAL 10 5 1 10 8840 1 216 813 11 METAL CHIP 841 1 216 809 11 METAL R698 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R842 1 216 857 11 METAL CHIP R699 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 R843 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP R702 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R844 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R705 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R712 1 218 883 11 METAL CHIP 33K 0 5 1 10 R845 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R852 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R713 1 218 871 11 METAL CHIP 10K 0 5 1 10 R854 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R714 1 216 855 11 METAL CHIP 680K 5 1 10 R858 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP 715 1 216 841 11 METAL 47 5 1 10 R859 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 716 1 216 845 11 METAL 100 5 1 10 718 1 218 867 11 METAL 6 8 05 1 10 R860 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP R861 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R862 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R863 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP R864 1 216 807 11 METAL CHIP 8 8
129. 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R270 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 1K 5 1 16W R272 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 1K 5 1 16W R535 1 218 962 11 5 6K 5 1 16 R274 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10 5 1 16W 8547 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R549 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R276 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 1K 5 1 16W R551 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R279 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R552 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R282 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R303 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W R553 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R554 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R304 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W R555 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R556 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 8557 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R305 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R558 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R306 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W R560 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R603 1 218 942 11 120 5 1 16W R307 1 218 933 11 RES CHIP 22 5 1 16W R605 1 218 942 11 120 5 1 16W HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R607 1 218 942 11 RES CHIP 120 5 1 16W R308 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R609 1 218 942 11 RES CHIP 120 5 1 16W R312 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R611 1 218 942 11 RES CHIP 120 5 1 16 520 725 727 920 925 R612 1 218 95
130. 1 SHORT CHIP 0 R639 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R640 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R1001 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R641 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 81002 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R642 1 218 977 11 100K 5 1 16W R1003 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R643 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R1004 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R1005 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R644 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R645 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R1006 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R646 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R1007 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R647 1 218 949 11 470 5 1 16W R1008 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R1009 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 1K 5 1 16W R648 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R1010 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W EXCEPT HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 1011 1 218 962 11 5 6 5 1 16W R649 1 218 941 81 RES CHIP 100 5 1 16W R1012 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R1030 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W R650 1 218 949 11 470 5 1 16W R1035 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R1037 1 218 961 11 4 7K 5 1 16W R651 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 EXCEPT HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 1039 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W R652 1 218 941 81 RES CHIP 100 5 1 16W R1040 1 218 937 11 47 5 1 16W HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R1041 1 218 937 11
131. 10 Mystery number Sub menu 4 Select Play and press ENTER Playback starts from the selected title To stop playback Press stop To scroll the list display by page Page mode Press lt gt while the list display is turned on Each time you press 4 e the entire Title List changes to the next previous page of titles About the Title List for HDD DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode You can switch the Title List to show Original or Playlist titles While the Title List menu is turned on press gt Unseen Title HDD only In order of when the titles were recorded The title that is recorded most recently and has not been played is listed at the top Playlist titles are not displayed To change a title thumbnail picture Thumbnail HDD DVD RW DVD R in VR mode only You can select a favourite scene for the thumbnail picture shown in the Title List menu 1 Press TITLE LIST Press 9 to switch the Title Lists if necessary Select a title and press ENTER The sub menu appears Select Set Thumbnail and press ENTER The display for setting the thumbnail point appears and the title starts to play While watching the playback picture press lt P gt to select the scene you want to set for a thumbnail picture and press ENTER Playback pauses Press ENTER if the scene is correct If the scene is incorrect press 4 to select the scene you wa
132. 107 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 03004 1 107 726 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V 03108 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 03109 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 CONNECTOR 03110 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 03111 8 719 988 61 DIODE 1SS355TE 17 CN3003 1 815 383 11 CONNECTOR FPC FFC 15 CN3004 1 785 828 21 CONNECTOR SQUARE DV IN 03112 8 719 056 82 DIODE UDZ TE 17 6 2B CN3005 1 573 806 21 PIN CONNECTOR 1 5MM SMD 6P FERRITE BEAD DIODE FB3101 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 03002 8 719 077 79 DIODE SLR 332VRT32 SYNCHRO REC FB3102 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD D3003 8 719 077 79 DIODE SLR 332VRT32 TIMER REC D3004 6 500 176 01 DIODE EB3804X TP J555K HDD D3005 8 719 084 27 DIODE SLI 343YCT32WST DVD Note The components identified by mark or dotted 8 10 line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified Ref Description IC 103001 6 706 783 01 BU2050F E2 103002 6 600 500 01 10 GP1UM28XKOSF lt TRANSISTOR gt 03001 8 729 421 22 TRANSISTOR UN2211 03002 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 lt RESISTOR gt 83001 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 83003 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R3004 1 216 829 11 METAL CHIP 4 7K 5 83005 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 83006 1 216 813 11 METAL CHIP 220 5 83007 1 216 813 11 METAL CHIP 220 5 83008 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R3009 1 216 806 11 METAL CHIP 56 596 R3010 1 21
133. 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 20 6 3V 01033 1 127 715 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 22uF 10 C603 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20 6 3V C1034 1 165 887 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 22uF 1090 C606 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20 6 3V C1035 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 1090 6607 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 20 6 3V C1036 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 1090 61037 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 C609 1 128 994 21 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20 10V 06610 1 128 994 21 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20 10V 1038 1 112 833 11 ELECT CHIP 68uF 2090 0611 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 C614 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 CONNECTOR 0615 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 CN101 1 818 857 51 CONNECTOR FFC FPC 40 C616 1 164 937 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 001uF 10 50 CN601 1 816 339 21 CONNECTOR BOARD TO BOARD 9P C617 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 CN701 1 573 806 21 PIN CONNECTOR 1 5MM SMD 6P C618 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C619 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 FERRITE BEAD C620 1 162 960 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220 10 FB101 1 400 794 21 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 C621 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V FB103 1 400 794 21 FERRITE SMD 1608 0622 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 FB106 1 469 670 21 FERRITE EMI SMD 2012 C623 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20 6 3V FB107 1 469 670 21 FERRITE EMI SMD 2012 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 H
134. 11 x I RISMSTATUS52 1 1 COUTAUX 8 1 pM 1 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 E 5 POWER MUTE i SWITCH A 2 HX520 AEP1 2 UK HX525 HX720 HX722 0304 1 XP AMUTE E NISE RX 10803 6 1 2 2 DIAG DIAG VIDEO 1 CN502 EROR 1 SELECTOR 222222 1 4 RD 060 BOARD 2 XLMUTE 3 5 CHECK 20 u a s 47715 31617189 01 598445582 c hol VY OUT 1 187682 o Hole BLANKING OUT 8158 R C OUT 1 802 AV LINK VETT o 0 AUDIO ASW 8 4 FUNCTION SW OUT SELECTOR 9 ITREOS 8 _ ITREQ 09 71 30 asw 605 8 o A IN T RIAL TIME CLOCK 8 cnvss RISM STATUS2 d A L QUT 1 Awe 175015 3 o A R IN T aswa 8 502 6 9 2 NR QUT 1 118005 5 9 ASWS fi 8032 64 ITSCKS T ASWS i XCIN ITSCLK 6 TUL RISM RTSO 1 VIN3 4 TULIN 1 XRESET MONITOR OUT 3 TUR LO un 7 XINT2 RISMSTATUS 69 o BLANKING IN TH601 1 o 9 RIN L2LIN FS AUX IN 60 GIN FUNCHONSWIN 1603 EEP SDA SDA IC604 LINE 3 DECODE 1 L LLIN 603 IT CONTROL EEPR011 66 AD A R INT 2 7 A L OUT 3 LERIN ADR OUT 0 d A R IN3 A L INS 9 AUX L IN Hn 1 o T 2 A R OUT 4 FUNCTION SW
135. 124 75 132 75 i Talia A H S36 S39 419 25 427 25 those listed below D 13355 14055 UEP si 4035 vis 537 540 427 25 435 25 81 820 ss Tm 538 541 435 25 443 25 521 541 HYPER 5 T T 39 542 443 25 451 25 801 305 5 ET 16475 173 540 543 451 25 459 25 DK East European 1 12 VHF sia ai 841 544 459 25 467 25 2 75 Countries R21 R69 G 58 172 75 180 75 81 520 CATV 59 180 75 188 75 H 510 188 75 196 75 Channel Sort 821 541 HYPER n a 501 505 511 196 75 204 75 After the been set 1 512 204 75 212 75 you can change the order of each programme I Great Britain Ireland A J VHF position in the display list Ireland 513 212 75 220 75 South Africa 4 13 1 Select Channel Sort in Basic and VHF K 514 220 75 228 75 press ENTER B21 B69 UHF L 515 228 15 236 15 1 520 L 516 236 75 244 75 S21 541 HYPER M S17 244 75 252 75 801 505 N 518 252 75 260 75 L France 2 10 VHF N 519 260 75 268 75 F21 F69 UHF 520 268 75 276 75 P S21 276 75 284 75 2 Press t o select the row containing the programme position you want to 21 541 HYPER P 822 284 75 292 75 move and press ENTER L is only available with French RDR HX520 Q 523 292 75 300 75 display other pages programme receive broadcasts 821 524 299 25 307 25
136. 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C217 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP C218 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP C219 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP C220 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP C222 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP C223 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP C224 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 0 1 0 1uF 0 1 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 10uF 0 1uF 0 1 0 1 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 12PF 12PF 0 01uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 10uF 10uF 0 01uF 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 10 Remarks Description 10V C230 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 10V C231 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 10V C232 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 10V C233 1 165 887 91 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 0234 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 0235 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 10V C236 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 10V C237 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V C301 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 H C302 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V HX520 AEP3 HX725
137. 160 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R405 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 1K 5 1 10W HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 8407 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 1K 5 1 10W R218 1 218 879 11 METAL CHIP 22K 0 5 1 10 8409 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 1K 5 1 10W R219 1 218 879 11 METAL CHIP 22K 0 5 1 10 R410 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W R222 1 218 871 11 METAL CHIP 10K 0 5 1 10 R411 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W R223 1 218 871 11 METAL CHIP 10K 0 5 1 10 R412 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W 8224 1 218 863 11 METAL CHIP 4 7K 0 5 1 10 414 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10W R225 1 218 863 11 METAL CHIP 4 7K 0 5 1 10 R415 1 216 838 11 METAL CHIP 27K 5 1 10W 8226 1 218 863 11 METAL CHIP 4 7K 0 5 1 10 R418 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10W 8227 1 218 863 11 METAL CHIP 4 7K 0 5 1 10 R420 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W R304 1 216 849 11 METAL CHIP 220K 5 1 10 R422 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W R305 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W 423 1 216 864 11 5 0 R306 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10 5 1 10W R428 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W R307 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R429 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W R308 1 216 841 11 METAL CHIP 47K 5 1 10W R475 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R309 1 216 830 11 METAL CHIP 5 6K 5 1 10W R604 1 216 841 11 METAL CHIP 47K 5 1 10 10 1 218 864 11 METAL CHIP 5 1K 05 1 40W R606 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10 5 1 10W R311 1 218 864 11 METAL CHIP 5 1K 0 5 1 10 8
138. 18 827 11 METAL CHIP TRANSISTOR R167 1 218 827 11 METAL CHIP 168 1 218 827 11 METAL CHIP Q601 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 R169 1 218 827 11 METAL CHIP 0602 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 0603 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 170 1 218 827 11 METAL CHIP 0604 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 8171 1 218 935 11 RES CHIP 0605 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 R172 1 218 933 11 R173 1 218 933 11 0606 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 8174 1 218 933 11 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0607 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 R175 1 218 933 11 520 725 727 920 925 180 1 218 965 11 181 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP lt RESISTOR gt 182 1 218 945 11 183 1 218 945 11 RES CHIP 103 1 218 990 81 5 0 104 1 218 990 81 5 0 190 1 208 699 11 METAL CHIP 105 1 218 990 81 5 0 191 1 208 699 11 METAL 106 1 218 941 81 RES CHIP 100 5 1 16W R192 1 208 699 11 METAL CHIP R107 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R193 1 208 699 11 METAL CHIP 8196 1 218 953 11 8 14 0 100 100 1K 10K 5 6K 4 7K 10K 2 2K 2 2K 2 2K 2 2K 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5
139. 18 965 11 RES CHIP 10 5 1 16 520 725 727 920 925 R233 1 218 953 11 1K 5 1 16W 329 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 237 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R238 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 1K 5 1 16W R336 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W R240 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 1K 5 1 16W HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R243 1 218 953 11 1K 5 1 16W R337 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R245 1 218 949 11 470 5 1 16W R338 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R246 1 218 989 11 RES CHIP 1M 5 1 16W HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 R247 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 1K 5 1 16W R248 1 208 709 11 METAL CHIP 12K 05 1 16 R504 1 218 961 11 4 7K 5 1 16W R249 1 218 941 11 RES CHIP 100 5 1 16W R513 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16 R518 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10 5 1 16W R250 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R519 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10 5 1 16W R252 1 216 864 11 5 CHIP 0 R522 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R258 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 1K 5 1 16W R261 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W R523 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16 265 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10 5 1 16W R524 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R525 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R267 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 1K 5 1 16W R532 1 218 962 11 RES CHIP 5 6K 5 1 16 R269 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 1K 5 1 16W R533
140. 20 20 10 20 20 10 10 20 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 Remarks Ref No Part No Description 16V 0751 1 107 826 11 35V 0752 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 50V 0753 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 0762 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C772 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V 0774 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C775 1 126 947 11 ELECT 16 6801 1 107 726 91 16 0802 1 126 964 11 ELECT 16 0803 1 126 964 11 ELECT 35V C804 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 0805 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 0807 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 0809 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 6 3V C810 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 0813 1 104 658 91 ELECT 16 C816 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 6817 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C818 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 0819 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 0820 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 6821 1 107 826 11 16 C822 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 35V C823 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C824 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 35V 0825 1 104 658 91 ELECT 35V C826 1 126 947 11 16 0827 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16 C828 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 35V C829 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 35V C830 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 50V C832 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C833 1 126 947 11 ELECT 16V C834 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C835 1 107 826 11 CE
141. 20 20 10 10 10 5 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 5 10 20 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 Remarks 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10V 35 16 50V 50V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10V 35V 16V 16V 16V 50V 16V 35 16 16 16 16 16 50V 16V 35 16 10 10V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 10V 10V 10V 10V 103 Remarks HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 Ref No Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description C865 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V 0732 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 0866 1 126 947 11 ELECT 47uF 20 35V D801 8 719 069 55 DIODE UDZSTE 175 6B C867 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 0802 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1103 1 125 837 91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 6 0803 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 D804 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B C1104 1 162 962 11 CERAMIC CHIP 470PF 10 HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 0805 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B D806 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1109 1 162 917 11 CERAMIC CHIP 15PF 5 50V 0807 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 525 725 727 925 0808 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 61110 1 162 917 11 CERAMIC CHIP 15PF 5 50V 0809 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 525 725 727
142. 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010 4 RB152 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010X4 AC114 CERAMIC 680pF 250V 154 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010X4 88155 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010X4 lt FUSE gt RB156 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010X4 AF101 FUSE T3 15A 250V RB157 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010 4 A P201 CHIP FUSE 3 15A RB158 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010 4 A P301 CHIP FUSE 2A RB159 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010X4 A P502 CHIP FUSE 2A RB160 1 234 380 21 RES NETWORK 47K 1005X4 A P601 CHIPFUSE 2A RB161 1 234 380 21 RES NETWORK 47K 1005X4 A P602 CHIP FUSE 5A RB162 1 234 380 21 RES NETWORK 47K 1005 4 RB163 1 234 380 21 RES NETWORK 47K 1005X4 lt CONNECTOR gt RB168 1 234 380 21 RES NETWORK 47K 1005X4 EXCEPT HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 A CN101 AC INLET 169 1 234 380 21 RES NETWORK 47K 1005X4 EXCEPT HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 lt COIL gt RB170 1 234 380 21 RES NETWORK 47K 1005X4 LINE FILTER 0 4 EXCEPT HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 A L102 LINE FILTER 0 4 RB175 1 234 378 21 RES NETWORK 10K 1005X4 RB179 1 234 378 21 RES NETWORK 10K 1005X4 lt RESISTOR gt RB180 1 234 378 21 RES NETWORK 10K 1005X4 RB181 1 234 378 21 RES NETWORK 10K 1005X4 A R101 CARBON 220 1 2W RB182 1 234 378 21 RES NETWORK 10K 1005X4 lt VARISTOR gt RB183 1 234 378 21 RES NETWORK 10K 1005 4 RB184 1 234 378 21 RES N
143. 24 5 9 HDATAI3 REC65613 655 S 2 D HDATA 10 4 8 25 REC65610 KETA E 2 por 5 Pm 4 E 3 EYE su m 8 w HDATA T EP 124 525 HDATAZ 0152 DDASIOL DOGS OL w 1 2 vssa 8 c4 8 0 VDD a 20 000511 0 000511 DOS1 2 5 iy HME niri was 5 m Hb T e HDATA 3 zo 524 2 5 TESTMODS 61222 2 rra R1039 200521 000821 22 5 22 2 9 4700 HATARI 23 HDATA1 TESTMOD4 1 0005 3 0 0005131 3 0 5 ACE TESTMOD3 w 2 ver 2 HDATA 0 We nd TESTMOD2 DT R1064 192 x r 5 223 DVSS TESIMOD1 2 ne vss 8 25 TESTMODO 1 DDM 0 DDM1 2 B DDM 3 6116 23 55 VSS amp 11 N LDM UDM lt p 24 PCO vob 154 DWE1 w 5 B e NILUS 22 VMCLK VDD33 Ou 5 WE RIE gt VSSADA10 ES a DCASI COE gt 220 1 409 pem A 65 2 mel EROS 22 20 T VSSADA10 156 5 RS 5 RISE 223 RXO VCCADA10 BT B BOUT DCS1 2 R180 zal C24 RX1 BOUT PD2 AD8 GOUT amp cs NC S 10k EUR 022 520 GOUTIPD1 009 Ger lt Em 21 RX3 ROUT PDO 406 RT
144. 311 12303 R350 25V MSB709 RT1 S T111B50MC OHJTFG R34 7 8 68 5 COAXIAL 2SB1561T100Q gt 954 72 tk 18 8309 5 8 50 E w O TO 1 8 5600 12V SWITCH C321 7 0324 1 GND A gt 1u R334 R347 R348 325 0303 10k 5 220 100 cup 8304 9 5 MSD601 RST1 10V 220k SWITCH 0304 8868 2 y R338 100k 16V p 1 D IN 73 10k 1 2X2 iom EJ 2 j UNSW 8V A gt 0 1 34 Y s T XLMUTE gt gt od 85 594 0302 C307 8364 XRMUTE 22 i 2SD1781K T146 QR 5 0205 2136 C308 C309 MUN2111T1 8V SWITCH EX ru NE 5 B 47u 5 0 SWITCH MUN2213T1 TO 1 8 5 8 lt gt Yaa Me 10k sel a Suc a lees 0312 1 0805 0307 0811 857 6327 1 9 5 72 1 on 1 0322 R336 a 1 1 95 TO 5 8 lt XP_AMUTE i 1 R339 R333 10k 10 94 1 2 0306 x I BCR148 E3627 CS 85 a 2 84 f Ix 2303 C318 41 BAS16 03W 1 220 Ti 1 1 520 725 727 920 925 AUDIO OUT 4 9 4 10 AV 103 3 8 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 10 11 12 13 14 15
145. 327 10302 8 759 100 96 uPC4558G2 Q306 6 551 199 01 TRANSISTOR BCR148 E6327 10303 6 705 313 01 IC S T111B50MC OHJTFG HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 10401 8 749 925 00 TK11819MTL 0307 8 729 027 53 TRANSISTOR DTC124TKA T146 10402 6 706 237 01 1 55 25 0308 8 729 027 53 TRANSISTOR DTC124TKA T146 10601 6 706 673 01 S 80852CNMC B9DT2G HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0309 6 551 287 01 TRANSISTOR 2502704 146 10603 6 806 620 01 IC M306H5MG A13FP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 0310 6 551 287 01 TRANSISTOR 2502704 146 10603 6 806 673 01 306 5 033 0811 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 HX520 HX720 HX722 HX920 0312 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 16604 6 708 842 01 S 24CS04AFJ TB G 520 725 727 920 925 10605 6 708 948 01 R2051S03 E2 F 0313 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 10701 6 708 957 01 TK72233CMCL G Q401 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 10702 6 708 890 01 IC LA73036M TBA E 0403 8 729 010 25 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RT1 10801 6 705 338 01 TK11250CMCL G 0405 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 10802 6 708 892 01 BD3826FS 0407 6 551 199 01 TRANSISTOR 148 6327 10803 6 708 887 01 7626 52 0601 6 551 199 01 TRANSISTOR BCR148 E6327 101102 6 806 080 01 10 M30263M6A 703FP Q611 8 729 421 22 TRANSISTOR UN2211 HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 0612 6 550 280 01 TRANSISTOR BC857CE6327 161103 8 759 649
146. 33 A 3 2108 952 1 PANEL ASSY FRONT SILVER 727 10 1176 321 3 2109 931 1 PANEL ASSY FRONT SILVER HX520 UK 11 1 479 557 11 3 X 2109 932 1 PANEL ASSY FRONT SILVER HX720 UK 3 X 2108 953 1 PANEL ASSY FRONT BLACK HX720 AEP 11 1 479 558 11 3 2108 954 1 PANEL ASSY FRONT SILVER 925 3 2108 955 1 PANEL ASSY FRONT SILVER 920 12 2 658 476 01 COVER 3 2108 956 1 PANEL ASSY FRONT SILVER 722 3 2108 962 1 PANEL ASSY SILVER 725 8 1 8 1 2 CHASSIS SECTION not supplied supplied not supplied 55 8 supplied supplied not supplied Ref No Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks 51 A 1183 523 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX520 AEP1 2 54 1 831 511 11 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FRA 004 51 1183 524 RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE 525 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX920 HX925 51 A 1183 525 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX520 AEP3 55 3 087 675 01 6 320 5 51 A 1183 526 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX725 AEP1 56 3 089 380 01 DAMPER 51 A 1183 527 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX725 UK 57 2 159 920 01 SCREW HDD DAMPER A58 1 797 413 11 DRIVE DVD DRW V35A 51 A 1183 528 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX727 AEP1 51 1183 530 RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX725 AEP3 59 A 1192 736 A HDD SATA 160GB ASSY 720 722 725 727 51 1183 531 RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE 925 59 A 1192 748 A HDD SATA 80GB ASSY 520 52
147. 348 1 216 813 11 METAL CHIP 220 5 1 10W R350 1 216 807 11 METAL CHIP 68 5 1 10W 8 7 103 Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description R645 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 R719 1 218 852 11 METAL CHIP R646 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 8726 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 47 1 216 817 11 METAL 470 5 1 10 R728 1 216 840 11 METAL CHIP R648 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 8729 1 216 837 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R733 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP R649 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 R736 1 216 801 11 METAL CHIP 50 1 216 833 11 METAL 10 5 1 10 R738 1 216 801 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 740 1 216 801 11 METAL CHIP R651 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 742 1 216 801 11 METAL CHIP R652 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 8744 1 216 801 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R654 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 747 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 8749 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP R655 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 R750 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 751 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP R656 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 1K 5 1 10 752 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP R658 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 R659 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 753 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP R660 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 755 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP R661 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 8760 1 216 833 11 METAL
148. 5 51 A 1183 532 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX920 59 A 1192 749 A HDD SATA 250GB ASSY 920 925 51 A 1185 667 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX720 AEP2 60 1 832 951 12 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FRD 010 61 3 077 331 31 BV3 3 CR 51 A 1185 668 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX722 51 1194 638 RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE 520 0 62 3 088 023 01 B3 3 CR 51 A 1194 639 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE 720 0 63 1 787 290 21 D C 51 A 1194 640 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX727 AEP3 64 1 831 414 11 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FAR 004 52 3 077 331 01 BV3 3 CR A65 1 468 961 11 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK ATU401 8 597 558 00 TUNER FSS BTF DC441 53 1 831 411 11 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FRA 005 HX520 AEP1 2 UK HX525 HX720 HX722 54 1 831 410 11 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FRA 003 HX725 AEP1 UK HX727 AEP1 HX520 AEP1 2 UK HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 AEP1 UK HX727 ATU401 8 597 559 00 TUNER FSS BTF DF441 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 Note The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified 8 2 103 8 2 ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST NOTE Due to standardization replacements in the RESISTORS When indicating parts by reference number parts list may be different from the parts All resistors are in ohms please include the board name specified in the diagrams or the components METAL metal film resistor used on
149. 5 So vssa 5 HADES 1 1100 vs ou 8 5 RISIBI 15 HADRS11 VSS w5 Peel DDATA 19 raz DDT2 19 bat 0014 8 mn 15 HADRS12 vob33 vs u DDT2 2 DDT2 13 CHADRSHSI RETE ME 15 gt lt HADRS13 VDD gt US C173 rast v vars 8 mes 94 u HADRST4 TRST TERY 16 DDT2 T 861401 YT 2 Ne vssa 5 501010 ANC Cu TDO RB120 DDT2 3 R1062 0 gt lt DDT2 12 T 14 514 HADRSI7 TDI Et 33 pos 012018 uW 13 HADRS18 EVENT DDATAHS ag 001215 13 HADRS19 D PERAH T 004 Tm H Eo cox ORAS 460 028 Sand MDC 814 15 HADRS22 TRDATAS 1L180 00121217 8 S 5 J AM 612 HADRS23 TRDATA4 81 9j 182 01029 2 DOS 5 W 08524 TRDATA3 IL183 10 DDT2 6 007219 4 55158 012 HADRS25 TRDATA2 T pos Das 8 11 HADRS26 Gat 05 58 18 esv S vsso 8 RE PN S14 HADRS28 TRSYNC 1187 DDT2 7 S pos X DDT2 8 T D HADRS29 Gea PHYSCLK 5157 8183 919 HADREST PHYLREQ UT 02 5 wc nc 8 4700 rissraTuse HES an Drs eed Br
150. 5MG A13FP M306H5MC C33FP M306H5FGFP AV 103 BOARD ONDO Function Detection of board temperature SIRCSIN Input of remote control signal AVLINK IN Input of AV LINK scart signal FLD_DATA Output of FLD data signal FLD_IN Fixed at L FLD_CLK Output of FLD clock signal BYTE Fixed at L CNVSS Connected to GND when the flash is overwritten is VCC XCIN Input of sub clock signal 32 768KHz XCOUT Not used um RESET Input of system reset signal input N XOUT Output of main clock signal 1OMHz 55 Digital GND gt XIN Input of main clock signal 10 2 UA VCCI Power supply input Digital 5 0V _NMI Fixed at H INT Input of RTC INT signal from Real Time Clock _IT_REQ Input of communication request signal with system controller SLICE Input of slicer operation detection from 37 pin N IT Output communication reset signal with 3 N DIMMER Output of LED power supply switch N N JUST_CLK_2 Not used N RISM_STATUS2 Output of communication status 2 signal with system controller N 75 Not used N 74 Not used N ON P73 Not used
151. 6 811 11 METAL CHIP 150 5 R3012 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R3013 1 218 855 11 METAL CHIP 2 2 0 5 R3014 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2 5 R3015 1 216 827 11 METAL CHIP 3 3K 5 R3016 1 216 830 11 METAL CHIP 5 6K 5 R3017 1 216 832 11 METAL CHIP 8 2K 5 R3018 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 R3019 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 R3020 1 216 827 11 METAL CHIP 3 3K 5 R3023 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 R3024 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 lt SWITCH gt 83001 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE PLAY 3002 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE REC STOP 83003 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE REC 53004 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE STOP 53005 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE DUB 53006 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE OPEN CLOSE 53007 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE CH 83008 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE CH 83009 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE REC MODE 3012 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE DVD 83013 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE HDD 53014 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE INPUT SELECT FR 240 RD 060 Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks A 1183 523 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE 520 1 2 1183 524 RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE 525 1183 525 RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX520 AEP3 A 1183 526 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX725 AEP1 A 1183 527 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX725 UK 1183 528 RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX727 AEP1 A 1183 530 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX725 AEP3 A 1183 531 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX
152. 608 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R312 1 218 864 11 METAL CHIP 5 1K 0 5 1 10 R609 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10W R313 1 218 864 11 METAL CHIP 5 1K 0 5 1 10 R610 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W R314 1 218 865 11 METAL CHIP 5 6K 0 5 1 10 R611 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R315 1 218 865 11 METAL CHIP 5 6K 0 5 1 10 R613 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 8316 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 1 10W 14 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 R317 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2 5 1 10W R615 1 216 829 11 METAL CHIP 4 7K 5 1 10 18 1 216 825 11 METAL 2 2 5 1 10W 16 1 216 829 11 METAL CHIP 4 7K 5 1 10W R320 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 1 10W R617 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 321 1 218 865 11 METAL CHIP 5 6K 0 5 1 10 R618 1 218 875 11 METAL CHIP 15K 0 5 1 10 R323 1 218 865 11 METAL CHIP 5 6K 0 5 1 10 R619 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R326 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W R620 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R327 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W R621 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R330 1 216 841 11 METAL CHIP 47K 5 1 10W R622 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R331 1 216 841 11 METAL CHIP 47K 5 1 10W R623 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R332 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R624 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 R333 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 R626 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 520 725 727 920
153. 66 T NC 2 09 211 RTS0 ud SC 2 150 150 150 DBAT O 8 mao Au DADR 11 SI 405 05 T 05 7 0 5 9 nis 3 92 007 205 05 T 05 S DADRI9 1102 9 4 622 24 RIS2 gt vu 5 RED 1128 620 529 659 10 your DADRI10 5 DADRI8 41103 BSE 1 51 YOUT PD4 AE9 TOUT N ATO AP 9 F CTS 2 0 18 CTS2 COUTIPDS 1 R167 DADR O S 8 DADR 7 150 E E 30 10 60 519 0106 066 T 10057 09 DADR I CHE DADR S T 19 8001 TRU 8 DADAS ET 17 Saba 17 31 25 0159 5 8 ne 817 22 VobSS A 160 DADRI3 z DADA sue 16103 5 0 5 0161 B RECCR 8 58 E16 VSS VCCAAD10B 05 C163 27 DDT2 27 THE T ORDE AAI L A t ERE 018 MSDATA2 VSSAAD10A D3 8107 16106 VSSAAD10A C166 01u B HY5DU121622CTP JDR G TS m MS VRMA 9 EE B 1 16 MSINS VRPA 0175 RECVY vss 8 HADRSIS M YINVINA2 RES 209 DDT2I0 lt lt 2115 mn 17 S15 PADRES cue 1176 S poo vars 8 is HADES de Gos 209 5 We VDD33
154. 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C155 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C156 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C157 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C158 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C159 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C160 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C161 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C162 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C163 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C164 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C165 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C166 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C167 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C168 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C169 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C170 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C171 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C172 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C173 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C174 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C175 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C176 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C177 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP C188 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C189 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C190 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C191 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C192 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C193 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C194 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C195 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C196 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C197 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C198 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C199 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C201 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C202 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C203 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP C204 1 164 852 11 CERAMIC CHIP C205 1 164 852 11 CERAMIC CHIP C206 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP C207 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C208 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C209 1 125 837 91 CERAMIC CHIP C210 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C214 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP C215 1
155. 796 21 FERRITE CHIP D608 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W FB814 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP D701 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W FB815 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0702 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 FB816 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0703 8 719 053 18 DIODE 1SR154 400TE 25 817 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0704 8 719 053 18 DIODE 1SR154 400TE 25 FB818 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD D714 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 FB819 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0715 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 FB820 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD D721 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 FB821 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0724 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 FB822 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0728 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 FB824 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP D731 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 8 5 103 Ref Description Remarks Ref Part No Description Remarks 10 lt TRANSISTOR gt 10102 6 702 889 01 SI 3033KS TL 0101 8 729 421 19 TRANSISTOR UN2213 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 Q301 8 729 424 08 TRANSISTOR UN2111 10104 6 708 913 01 TK73400AU3GO0L C 0302 8 729 921 80 TRANSISTOR 2501781 146 0 10107 6 707 208 01 TK11100CSCB G 0303 6 550 286 01 TRANSISTOR BC847CE6327 10202 8 759 100 96 IC uPC4558G2 0304 8 729 045 17 TRANSISTOR 258156171000 10203 8 759 100 96 uPC4558G2 0305 6 551 199 01 TRANSISTOR 148 6
156. 920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0 1uF 10 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 RD 060 Ref No Part No Description Remarks Ref Part No Description 0330 1 164 849 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 5PF 50V C805 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 1090 520 725 727 920 925 C806 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 0331 1 164 849 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 5PF 50V C807 1 164 854 11 CERAMIC CHIP 15PF 596 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 C808 1 164 854 11 CERAMIC CHIP 15PF 590 0332 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 C809 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 1090 520 725 727 920 925 0333 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 C810 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 1090 520 725 727 920 925 6811 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 1090 0334 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 C812 1 165 887 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 22uF 1090 520 725 727 920 925 0813 1 124 779 00 ELECT CHIP 10 20 C816 1 165 887 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 22uF 1090 0335 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 520 725 727 920 925 0817 1 128 994 21 ELEC
157. 925 1111 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 D810 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 D811 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1401 1 126 947 11 ELECT 47uF 20 35V 0812 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1402 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 0813 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 0814 8 719 069 56 DIODE UDZSTE 176 2B C1403 1 162 924 11 CERAMIC CHIP 56 596 50V C1404 1 162 907 11 CERAMIC CHIP 2 0 25PF 50V 0815 8 719 083 63 DIODE UDZSTE 1713B C1405 1 162 907 11 CERAMIC CHIP 2 0 25PF 50V 0816 8 719 069 56 DIODE UDZSTE 176 2B C1406 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 D817 8 719 083 63 DIODE UDZSTE 1713B C1407 1 162 924 11 CERAMIC CHIP 56 5 50V 0818 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B 0819 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1408 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 10 C1409 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 0820 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1410 1 126 964 11 ELECT 10uF 20 50V D821 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B 61411 1 126 962 11 ELECT 3 3uF 20 50V D822 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1412 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 0823 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 0824 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1413 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 C1414 1 126 964 11 ELECT 10uF 20 50V 0825 8 719 069 56 DIODE UDZSTE 176 2B 61415 1 127 715 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 22uF 10 16 D827 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1416 1 126 947 11 ELECT 47uF 20 35V 0828 8 719 069 56
158. 925 A 1183 532 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX920 1185 667 RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX720 AEP2 1185 668 RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX722 1194 638 RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX520 UK A 1194 639 A RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX720 UK 1194 640 RD 060 BOARD COMPLETE HX727 AEP3 1 10W kk kkk 1 10 1 10 lt gt 1 10 0101 1 127 715 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 22uF 10 16V C102 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V 1 10 C103 1 165 887 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 22uF 10 6 1 10 0104 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16 C107 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 1 10 0109 1 126 246 11 ELECT CHIP 220uF 20 4V 1 10 6110 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 10 10 1 10 C111 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 10 10 1 10 6112 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 1 10 6113 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 1 10 0114 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 10 1 10 6115 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 10 1 10 C116 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 10 10 1 10 C117 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 10 1 10 C118 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 10 10 C119 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 10 10 C120 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 10 10 6121 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 10 C122 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C123 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C124 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP
159. ADR 2 a SA C80 AT2CS 0 18223 CST AT2CS 1 HDD DRIVE RD 060 2 7 4 27 11 12 13 14 HDD UNIT 344 444 233 333 1 84954944 go s 5 5 5 lt lt 5 55 9210 B S s 2 a 58 8 S88 R 2 e R258 k ewe ae ot 212 013 SA 650 H CS SA 02 gt SA CS1 SA 012 C201 H_PDIAG_N 0214 SA 03 VDDIO er SA 011 UAI SA D4 HDD DRIVE H 004 GND C215 C202 10201 VDD og 0217 CN203 0205 88SA8040 TBC1C000 0 01u 1 GND sapio ud 1202 2 HT SA D5 18 D 15 e HT SA_D9 0219 0 01u 74 1204 0 01 4 GND 06 e 5 HR SA_D8 12 PIN 61 He SA 07 001 7 GND SA_XRST_ B T 82 252 gt SSL 5 285 I d 2 g Bs 8 ae 8 16 x 0 010 16 t P 2 16 0 5 8 R249 7 1 100 m C203 C204 C205 0206 R252 0 01 12 12
160. CHIP R761 1 216 829 11 METAL CHIP R662 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 772 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP R663 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 4 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 R776 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP 665 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 779 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R666 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R780 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP R785 1 216 864 11 5 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10 791 1 216 864 11 5 R668 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R669 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 802 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R670 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 R803 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R671 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10 R804 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 805 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R672 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 R806 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP HX520 HX720 HX722 HX920 R674 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 R807 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 675 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 R808 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R676 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 R819 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP R677 1 218 871 11 METAL CHIP 10K 0 5 1 10 R820 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP R821 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP R678 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10 679 1 216 833 11 METAL 10 5 1 10 R822 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 R823 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP R681 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 R825 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP R682 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10 R827
161. CONT E SH RXD2 im es _RESET P22 BS DEC SW T PCONT 41608 11 1865 10605 82051503 2 X0UT P23 BS CONV CONT INSEL_1 8609 x602 IC603 65 8848 INSEL 1 00k 1 5 1 vss P24 BS_COR_DET s INSEL 2 NOT USE CONTROLLER Fasas 9 w JNSELS RISM_STATUS5_1 BISMCSTATUSR T 5 egia 1560 C639 RISM STATUS5 2 JL656 R2 6 81 8 16 a _NMI 12603 P27 INSELS du RISM_STATUS5_2 9 50V M306H5MC C33FP HX520 HX720 HX722 HX920 He INT2 INT_RTC vss 16V 818 y gt RISM RTS 0 454 ITREQS M306H5MG A13FP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 IR 0 PSO INSELA4 118005 SCL 1150052 gt ITSDI5 mog 254 Revd ZINTDSUICEe P SYNGRO_DET SYNCRO DET ITSCKS SDA X603 10 XRST P31 XEEP_WP 697 S2sw 1 TO 2 8 ITSCK5 32 76 R1625 DIMMER 2200 JL664 esw ITREQ 10k TA4OUT DIMMER P32 EEP_SCL 255 INSEL_PCONT ireas 21665 INSEL PCONT TAGIN JUST 243 SDA e xITRSTS lt BISM STATUSS 2 P7G RISM STATUS2 P34 INSEL6 SVREF CSvREF D P75 P35 INSEL2 ee SYNCIN SYNCIN SEL 1 66 P74 V SYNC OUT P36 INSEL1 INSEL HDET NISE INSEL_3
162. Clock Quartz locked Timer indication 24 hour cycle digital Power back up duration 1 hour Video recording format MPEG 2 MPEG 1 Audio recording format applicable bit rate Dolby Digital 2 ch 256 kbps 128 kbps in EP and SLP mode Mechanical sound is heard when the recorder is off While the recorder is adjusting the clock for the Auto Clock Set function or scanning the programme positions for the PDC VPS function operational noises such as the internal fan may be heard even when the power is off This is not a malfunction gt To reduce the number of times that the fan turns on automatically set Power save standby to On in the Others setup page 96 Self diagnosis Function When letters numbers appear in the display When the self diagnosis function is activated to prevent the recorder from malfunctioning a five character service number e g C 13 00 with a combination of a letter and four numbers appears in the front panel display In this case check the following table First three Cause and or corrective characters of action the service number C13 There is a problem in the HDD gt Contact your nearest Sony dealer or local authorized service facility The DVD is dirty gt Clean the disc with a soft cloth DVD CD is not inserted correctly gt Re insert the disc correctly E XX To prevent a malfunction the xx is a number recorder
163. DDATA 15 Input output of data 15 for SDRAM DDATA 7 Input output of data 7 for SDRAM DDQS 0 Output of data strobe signal 0 PHYDIO 2 Input output of data 2 for PHY PHYLPS PHYSCLK Input of clock signal TRDATA 2 Not used VSS Digital GND DDATA 14 Input output of data 14 for SDRAM DDATA 13 Input output of data 13 for SDRAM VSS Digital GND VDD25 Power supply input Digital 2 5V DDATA 6 Input output data 6 for SDRAM PHYCTL 0 TRDATA 0 Not used TRCLK Not used TRDATA 6 Not used VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V DDATA 9 Input output of data 9 for SDRAM DDATA 11 Input output of data 11 for SDRAM 5 11 Pin Function DDATA 12 Input output of data 12 for SDRAM DDATAJ 5 Input output of data 5 for SDRAM VSS Digital GND 5 12E RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 SECTION 6 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 SERVICE MODE This is the diagnostics to locate cause of fault The diagnostics can be executed using the remote commander and a monitor To enter the service mode connect the VIDEO OUT connector of the main unit to the monitor While pressing the amp Open Close button and the gt PLAY button at the same time connect the AC power cord to the power outlet Keep pressing the above buttons until a message WELCOME appears on the display
164. DIODE UDZSTE 176 2B C1417 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 01103 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1418 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 D1400 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W C1419 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 C1452 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 01401 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W C1453 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 10 FERRITE BEAD CONNECTOR FB301 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD CN101 1 815 458 21 CONNECTOR BOARD TO BOARD 15 FB302 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD CN103 1 794 509 11 PIN CONNECTOR PC BOARD 3P FB801 1 500 283 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0 601 1 764 643 21 PIN CONNECTOR SMD 11 FB802 1 469 876 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD CN602 1 774 767 51 CONNECTOR FFC FPC 15P FB803 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP 0 701 1 770 468 21 PIN CONNECTOR PC BOARD 10 FB804 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP CN1102 1 691 591 11 PIN CONNECTOR 1 5MM SMD 8P 28805 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 FB806 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP FB807 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP DIODE FB808 1 500 283 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD D101 8 719 073 34 DIODE EC21QS03L TE12L FB809 1 469 876 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD D301 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W FB810 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP D303 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W FB811 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP D304 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W FB812 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 FB813 1 469
165. DRS 20 Output of address 20 HADRS 16 Output of address 16 HADRS 12 Output of address 12 HADRS 8 O O O O O O Output of address 8 MSBS Fixed at L MSDATA 2 Fixed at L MSCLK Fixed at L SCLK 0 Output of UART CSIO GPIO TX 1 Output of UART CSIO GPIO RTS 2 Fixed at H DVSS Digital GND PCO Not used AHVDD Power supply input Analog 3 3V 5 Input output of data 5 DVD ATIDATA 10 Input output of data 10 for DVD 13 Input output of data 13 for DVD 15 Input output of data 15 for DVD Input of I O ready signal ATIADRI O Output of devise address 0 for DVD ATICS 0 Output of chip select signal 0 for DVD 0 Output of transfer acknowledge signal GPIO 0 HCS 0 Output of chip select signal 0 HCS 5 Output of chip select signal GPIO 5 HADRS 28 Output of address 28 HADRS 24 Output of address 24 HADRS 19 Output of address 19 HADRS 15 Output of address 15 HADRS 11 Output of address 11 HADRSI6 Output of address 6 Fixed at L CTS 3 Not used SCLK 1 Output of UART CSIO GPIO CTS 0 Output of UART CSIO GPIO RTS 3 Not used RXI2 Output of UART CSIO
166. DVD R Video mode you can display the disc s menu by pressing TOP MENU or MENU To play VIDEO CDs with PBC functions PBC Playback Control allows you to play VIDEO CDs interactively using the menu on your TV screen When you start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC functions the menu appears Select an item using the number buttons and press ENTER Then follow the instructions in the menu press E gt when Press SELECT appears The PBC function of Super VIDEO CDs does not work with this recorder Super VIDEO CDs are played in continuous play mode only To change the angles If various angles multi angles for a scene are recorded on the disc appears the front panel display Press OPTIONS during playback to select Change Angle and press ENTER If you insert a DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD or CD press E gt Playback starts 2 Press TITLE LIST For details about the Title List see 3 Playing the Recorded Programme Title List on page 29 Example DVD RW To stop playback Press Bl To playback quickly with sound Scan Audio When you press gt gt during playback of a title recorded in the HDD you can play tmeust quickly with dialogue or sound x1 3 144768 appears UA M Travel Pe 10 Mystery 52 Playback options CRI No sound is output when you press two x or more times to change search speed To check the position of the
167. Digital GND DDATA 25 Input output of data 25 for SDRAM VDD25 Power supply input Digital 2 5 VSS Digital GND DDATA 16 Input output of data 16 for SDRAM DDATA 17 Input output of data 17 for SDRAM AOLRCKI Input of audio L R clock signal DACCLKO Not used SPDIFI Fixed at H PHYDIO 7 Input output of data 7 for PHY VSS Digital GND DDM 2 Output of data mask signal 2 for SDRAM DDQS 3 Output of data strobe signal 3 for SDRAM DDATA 24 Input output of data 24 for SDRAM VDD25 Power supply input Digital 2 5V VSS Digital GND PHYLREQ PHYDIO 6 Input output of data 6 for PHY PHYDIO 4 Input output of data 4 for PHY PHYDIO 1 Input output of data 1 for PHY VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V DDMII Output of data mask signal 1 for SDRAM DDQS 1 Output of data strobe signal 1 for SDRAM DDM 3 Output of data mask signal 3 for SDRAM DDM 0 Output of data mask signal 0 for SDRAM 0005121 Output of data strobe signal 2 for SDRAM PHYDIO 5 Input output of data 5 for PHY PHYDIO 3 Input output of data 3 for PHY PHYDIO 0 Input output of data 0 for PHY 1 Not used VDD33 Power supply input Analog 3 3V DAC VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VDD25 Power supply input Digital 2 5V
168. ELECT 100uF 20 16V C618 1 126 947 11 ELECT 4TuF 20 35 C306 1 104 662 91 ELECT 22uF 20 25V C619 1 162 970 11 CERAMIC CHIP 010 10 25V C307 1 115 467 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 22uF 10 10V C620 1 162 923 11 CERAMIC CHIP 47 595 50V C308 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V C621 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 14 10 16V C309 1 126 947 11 ELECT 4TuF 20 35V C622 1 162 923 11 CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5 50V C310 1 164 217 11 CERAMIC CHIP 150 5 50V C623 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V C311 1 164 217 11 CERAMIC CHIP 150PF 5 50 C624 1 162 923 11 CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5 50V C312 1 164 739 11 CERAMIC CHIP 560 5 50V C625 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 16V C313 1 164 739 11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5 50V C626 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V C314 1 164 218 11 CERAMIC CHIP 180PF 595 50V C627 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 C315 1 164 218 11 CERAMIC CHIP 180 590 50V C628 1 125 891 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 47uF 10 10V C316 1 126 947 11 ELECT 4TuF 20 35V C629 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 16V C317 1 126 947 11 ELECT 4TuF 20 35V C630 1 125 891 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 47uF 10 10V C318 1 126 934 11 ELECT 220uF 20 16V C631 1 162 964 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 001uF 10 50 C319 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 16V C632 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V C320 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 16V C633 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 0321 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP
169. ER w E 22 F GND I gt gt d J1101 7 R1146 G LINK GND T X gt AV 103 8 8 4 19 en RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 FL 159 BOARD FL DRIVER LINE2 IN POWER SW NO MARK REC PB MODE A Voltage measurement of the CSP IC and the Transistors with mark is not possible ND3101 FLUORESCENT TUBE DISPLAY 9 12 on LP IC P2 G Gy LINE2 IN S VIDEO NO i 9 VIDEO 7 AUDIOL I 9 5 101 283102 OEL 656202 o 1 33 31313 314 814 81418 331313 3 E o 2 e PES T G lt O 5 uj 9 aq o 9 al 0 03101 03102 13101 05 100uH B4 o a oj o S a 9 03101 03110 S 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2SC2411K T 146 CR 155355 1 7 13110 6 6 6 6 5 R3111
170. ETWORK 10K 1005X4 AZ101 VARISTOR S10K300 88185 1 234 378 21 RES NETWORK 10K 1005X4 RB186 1 234 378 21 RES NETWORK 10K 1005X4 lt PHOTO COUPLER gt 88219 1 234 702 11 RES NETWORK 68 1005X4 A PC101 PHOTO COUPLER PS2561AL RB220 1 234 702 11 RES NETWORK 68 1005X4 RB221 1 234 702 11 RES NETWORK 68 1005X4 TRANSFORMER RB222 1 234 702 11 RES NETWORK 68 1005X4 RB223 1 242 962 21 RES NETWORK 82X4 1005 AT101 SWITCHING TRANSFORMER RB301 1 234 370 21 RES NETWORK 22 1005 4 si HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 RB302 1 234 370 21 RES NETWORK 22 1005X4 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 RB501 1 234 379 21 RES NETWORK 22K 1005X4 RB502 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010X4 RB503 1 234 400 21 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 2010X4 8 17 Note The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified Ref Description Remarks 1 479 557 11 1 479 558 11 1 575 131 82 1 759 586 22 1 696 593 11 1 827 946 21 2 672 836 11 2 672 836 21 2 672 836 31 2 672 836 41 2 672 836 51 2 672 836 61 2 672 836 71 2 672 836 81 2 672 836 91 2 672 837 11 2 672 837 21 2 672 837 31 2 672 837 41 2 672 837 51 2 672 838 11 2 686 263 11 ACCESSORY amp PACKING MATERIALS fo ooo REMO
171. GPIO AHVSS Digital GND 1 Output of UART CSIO GPIO HDATA 15 Input output of data 15 ATIDATA 6 Input output of data 6 ATIDATA 9 Input output of data9 for DVD ATIDATA 2 Input output of data 2 for DVD 0 Input output of data 0 ATIDIOR Output of I O read signal ATIADR I Output of devise address 1 for DVD ATICS 1 Output of chip select signal 1 for DVD HDREQ 1 Fixed at L HWS 1 Fixed at H HCS 3 Fixed at H HADRS 29 Output of address 29 HADRS 25 Output of address 25 5 7 HADRS 18 Function Output of address 18 HADRS 14 Output of address 14 HADRS 9 Output of address 9 MSINS Fixed at L SCLK 2 Fixed at H CTS 2 Output of UART CSIO GPIO TX 0 Output of UART CSIO GPIO TX 3 Fixed at H RX 3 Fixed at H VMCLK Input of 27MHz system clock RX 0 Output of UART CSIO GPIO HDATA 13 Input output of data 13 HDATA 10 Input output of data 10 20811 Output of chip select signal for HDD driver ATIRESET Output of reset signal ATIDATA 7 Input output of data 7 for DVD ATIDATA 8 Input output of data 8 for DVD VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VSS Digital GND VDD Powe
172. HDD Gi Gm EIS ET cn E Playback direction only Plays in slow motion when pressed for more than one second in pause mode Plays one frame at a time when pressed briefly in pause mode MH pause Pauses playback To resume normal playback press D gt 54 To resume playback from the point where you stopped Resume Play When you press L again after you stop playback the recorder resumes playback from the point where you pressed To start from the beginning press OPTIONS to select Play Beginning and press ENTER Playback starts from the beginning of the title track scene The point where you stopped playing is cleared when you open the disc tray except for HDD you play another title except for HDD you switch the Title List menu to Original or Playlist HDD DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode only you edit the title after stopping playback you change the settings on the recorder you turn off the recorder VIDEO CD CD DATA DVD DATA CD only you make a recording except for HDD DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode you disconnect the mains lead Note You cannot resume playback during TV Pause To play restricted DVDs Parental Control If you play a restricted DVD the message Do you want to temporarily change the Parental Control level to appears on your TV screen 1 Select OK and press ENTER The display for entering your password appears
173. KNO RESET UNSW AV DCLKO 2024 w 1 Dour 008 2022 6 vaki DRAS 4 DCAS A023 1 Dwe 3023 1 1A YG XSYERST REIS RESET amp 2 1B 8X0 4 2A 2v 6 lt 023 HDATAD 66 8 10 5 2B 025 22 25 5 101 1016 50100 4 T 3A 20 5 1 F222425 07810 1938 623 025 RISMSTHTUS D iess 22 4B NAND CS i HCS2 89 NTIZI 1 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 INT2 123 IC605 ee HOE 52 HX520 AEP1 2 UK HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 AEP1 UK HX727 AEP1 AND GATE 2 10802 5 PLL FSEL 6 H25 FSEL 8 z 35 42 D00 D015 E 10 17 cm Lio 11 816 2 A768FS48K 611016 1 12 7 HADRS 6 30 10502 HADRS30 011 015 SUFETAND REF27M3 022 VMCLK 128Mbit XRESET 122 T 2 69 XCE 0182 XRMUTE 1 1 103 BOARD XLMUTE SEE PAGE 3 4 e 2 7 XSYSRST 3 5 3 6 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 3 4 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM SWITCHING REGULATOR
174. LOCK DIAGRAM 3 4 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 7 4 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4 1 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 1 4 2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS WAVEFORM ie b etos 4 4 AV 103 1 8 POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 5 AV 103 2 8 AUDIO IN SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 7 AV 103 3 8 AUDIO OUT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 9 AV 103 4 8 TUNER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 11 AV 103 5 8 IT CONTROLLER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 13 AV 103 6 8 VIDEO IN OUT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 15 AV 103 7 8 EURO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 17 AV 103 8 8 IR CNT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 19 FL 159 FL DRIVER LINE2 IN POWER SW SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 21 FR 240 DV REMOCON RECEIVER FUNCTION SW LED SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 23 RD 060 1 7 RISM3 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 25 RD 060 2 7 HDD DRIVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 27 RD 060 3 7 V DEC SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 29 RD 060 4 7 FLASH ROM SUPER AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 31 RD 060 5 7 AV CN POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 33 RD 060 6 7 DV PHY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 35 RD 060 7 7 PLL AUDIO AD DA SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 37 pads SWITCHING REGULATOR SRV 1858EK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 39 4 3 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS RD 060 RISM3 VDEC A V INTERFACE AUDIO DAC ADC PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4 4 5 IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 5 1 CONTROL IC
175. MENT 7 1 Video System Adjustment 2 S Video Output S Y Check Purpose Preparing for Adjustment This check confirms that the S video Y signal output has the rated 1 Equipments amplitude If it adjusted incorrectly the playback video signal will Oscilloscope not be displayed corrected even when the S video cable is connected Reference Disk Mode PLAY HLX 507 PAL single layer disc 6090 077 Signal Color bars HLX 506 PAL dual layer disc J 6090 078 A Test point S VIDEO OUTPUT S Y connector 1 Video Output Level Check terminated in 750 lt Purpose gt Instrument Oscilloscope This check is made to satisfy the PAL signal standard If it is adjusted Specification 1 0 V 0 07 incorrectly brightness will be too bright or too dark Mode PLAY Check method Signal Color bars 1 the PAL reference disc and play back 100 color ars Test point Output VIDEO connector 2 Confirm that the video level is 1 0 V 0 07 Vp p terminated in 750 Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 1 0 V 0 07 p p 1 0 0 07Vp p Check method 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the video level is 1 0 V 0 07 Vp p Fig 7 2 1 0 0 07 Vp p Fig 7 1 7 1 3 S Video Output S C Check lt Purpose gt This check confirms that the S video output S C conforms to the PAL standard If it adjusted incorrectly the playback color will not be too dark or too thi
176. METAL CHIP R878 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 8879 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP R886 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP R887 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP R888 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R889 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 8896 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 8897 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP R898 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP R899 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP R1101 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP R1103 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP R1105 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP R1106 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP R1107 1 216 029 00 RES CHIP R1108 1 216 819 11 METAL CHIP R1110 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 1111 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP R1115 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP R1116 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP R1120 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP R1132 1 216 029 00 RES CHIP R1133 1 216 829 11 METAL CHIP R1134 1 216 829 11 METAL CHIP R1139 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP R1140 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP R1141 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP Remarks Ref No Part No Description 75 590 1 10 R1142 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 75 590 1 10W 100K 5 1 10 1143 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 75 5 1 10W 75 5 1 10W R1144 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 75 5 1 10W 1146 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R1147 1 216 829 11 METAL CHIP 0 0 100K 5 1 10W R1148 1 216 029 00 RES CHIP 100K 5 1 10W R1401 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10W 81402 1 216 823 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10W R1403 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 0 R1406 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 0 R1407 1 216 819 11 METAL CHIP 0 1408 1 216 809 11 METAL 0 1409 1 216 809 11 METAL 100 5 1 10W R1410 1 216 825
177. MIC CHIP C726 1 125 837 91 CERAMIC CHIP C727 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C728 1 125 837 91 CERAMIC CHIP C729 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C730 1 104 662 91 ELECT C731 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C732 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C733 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C734 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C735 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C736 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C737 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C738 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C739 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C740 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C741 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C742 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C743 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C744 1 126 947 11 ELECT C745 1 126 947 11 ELECT C746 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C747 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C748 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C749 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP C750 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 47 680PF 0 1 0 1 1000uF 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF 47uF 0 1 0 01uF 0 1 uF uF 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 47 47 0 1 47 47 0 1 0 1 47 47 10 0 1 0 1 0 1 uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF 0 1 uF 01 22 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 47 uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF uF 47uF 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 uF uF uF uF 10 20 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
178. NG swiv MAIN RECT ee 0301 UNSW AY T EN g L posa 0301 L301 124 REG 0304 P3012A UNSW SV 1 ACIN D H AR VDEC 33V 5 10501 10502 im 05 0303 12V REG UNIT 1 602 128Mbit 256Mbit 4 4 3 1 1 301 s swsv 3 4V REG 0303 3 0106 1104 SW12V your i z qo HDD 0501 L501 5 UNIT IC202 N m t 4 16701 1 8 10201 1 UN8W12V s 4 IC502 DV INTERFACE 9 HDD DRIVE 2107 5V REG 5 me IC606 PHOTO COUPLER 12501 m uswa RESET 7 0201 120 SHUNT REGULATOR 1 unswav 1202 TA i 1 1 na ped an 14 UNSW 8V tj 7 0601 i 502 1 10604 10802 10803 PLL K TUA01 1 mmm d EN 5V 5V RRETAN 103 BOARD 5 EN 1 605 HX520 725 AEP3 AND GATE HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 1405 3 1406 8 1404 1 aida i 16402 10401 reso Swsv 8 TU5V REG TU30V REG i IC302 VIDEO DECODER x 1 8V REG unswev 6 7 i 1 1302 I
179. OM ae 03001 ATIIORDY IDE IORDY 27 AV 103 BOARD 2 40 Pi TIMER REC 1 2805 ROUT 306 ROUT AHDMACE R IDE DACK 01602 m 27 d P2 2 IDE INT SEE PAGE 3 4 2 SYNCHRD REC ATIINTRO 31 3001 LED DRIVE Y 656 9 viaa REC656 1 7 AT2DATA 0 HDD0 m L LED 2 AT2DATA 0 15 KEY 0 TO FROM lt 13 Yo 065617 1015 I HDD F 3 1 3 TIUS BOARD RECCOR oO 2013 REC656H AT2DATA 15 HODIS HR a UNIT BT 2 je b S3101 CN501 REC656V ABTS REC056V AT2RESET SM E 1 POWER SEE PAGE 3 4 E R656CLKI RESSCLKI 312031 81205111 5 53012 63014 53006 53009 53001 53005 i Emo 1 wb TT costo pape CE On waos S 01203 DVD HDD OPEN CLOSE PLAY REC STOP 5 En 8040 165 sono CEFO a INPUT SELECT CH REC MODE REC STOP DUB RECR 5 0 1 11 i FSS RESETB AT2ADR 0 ae 0 1 201 1 1 2 ATZDMACK HINTRO HDD DRIVE AT2DMACK 63 HDMACK TPA 12103 AT2IORDY HIORDY 2 CN3004 AT2DIOR ot HDIORN TPB ge DVIN EE QU ta pe mg eho are
180. P 75 5 1 10 63104 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220 5 50V R3109 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 03106 1 125 972 91 ELECT 100uF 20 16V R3111 1 216 827 11 METAL CHIP 3 3K 5 1 10 63110 1 106 363 00 MYLAR 0 0068uF 5 200 R3113 1 216 849 11 METAL CHIP 220 5 1 10W 03113 1 115 339 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 50V 3114 1 216 849 11 METAL CHIP 220K 5 1 10W 03114 1 128 131 11 ELECT 22uF 20 50V 3115 1 216 838 11 METAL CHIP 27K 5 1 10 63115 1 115 339 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 50V R3116 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10 63116 1 107 726 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16 R3123 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 63117 1 107 726 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16 R3124 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 63118 1 115 339 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 SWITCH C3120 1 164 217 11 CERAMIC CHIP 150 5 50V 63121 1 164 217 11 CERAMIC CHIP 150 5 50V 53101 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE POWER lt CONNECTOR gt lt TRANSFORMER gt CN3101 1 774 729 21 PIN CONNECTOR PC 10 13101 1 445 017 11 TRANSFORMER DC DC CONVERTER pn eee lt DIODE gt Not supplied 240 BOARD COMPLETE 03102 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 03103 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 03104 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 lt gt 03105 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 03106 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 03001 1 107 726 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V 03002 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 03
181. R R B 16 C OUT 4 gt amp TO 6 8 x 136 Raag ENC_R 05 3 oe 5 0 1 AVCC2 R896 470 i DETS L3RC PARALLEL1 0808 Tl 5 26 8 146 STZ6 8N T146 K amp p DTA114TKA T146 1 ER lt VY AD Y G B 18 10803 CVBS Y_OUT_to_L1 SWITCH 8874 C845 1 3 vy ap gt gt WD BH7626KS2 10k 220 849 ck E AU2INR E 041 10V 220p 2 AUZIND 20 FS2 823 5 VREF AU2IN 2 s oe 1000 16 alo ajoja OUT to e 84 al 45452 jelz E 0801 ene 1807 2 302020 ae 3 5 MSB709 RT1 0 2 G OUT to L1 5 SWITCH ASW6 2 Mri 5 26 8 146 STZ6 8N T146 5 2 2 UNSW 8V V 2 18 R C_OUT_to_L1 e Dus C824 Tu_cves 5 JL809 XT 7 0 8 FS1 i 74 3 Jn z lt gt rad SWITCH D828 2 UDZSTE 176 2 UDZSTE 175 6B 18 8 0824 Eleal x 5 STZ6 8N T146 2 5 unswev a D 2 2 z o S S 55 gt 5 TO 1 8 UNSWI2V A 3 8 8 9 5 gt 1803 bs 5 47uH 845 2 9 18 3 8 LINE1 TV G 1 oe 5 5 2 S zle 527 5 2 Pe zla lt agas GND v amp 2 2 z s s z 2
182. R828 lu 100 B Ww EURO 4 17 4 18 AV 103 7 8 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms AV 103 BOARD 8 8 RDR HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 IR CNT RESET5V NO MARK REC PB MODE 1 1102 121102 M30263M6A 1547U5 iida IR VF 1k P10 AN S 1k IR BUSY R1147 B 4700 CN1102 8P JL905 IR_GND 1 UN5V 2 1116 41907 100k P9 0 TBOIN XIR_RST AN30 CLKOUT FOR CHECK CNVss 4 9 1134 CNVss 7 22 e 5 S5 R1103 T0 5 8 e SH TXD2 6 9 SH Rxp2 7 e C NC 8 IR INT P6 A CISI RTS1 C1109 CTSO CLKS1 15p Y C1110 15 X1101 16 2 1111 P6 7 TxD1 D 010 P7 0 TxD1 SDA2 i i pas STB_RXD P7 1 RxD2 SCL2 JL901 TAOIN CLK1 e STB_TXD P8 3 INT1 Q1104 P7 3 CTS2 RTS2 1 03 258156171000 SWITCH P7 4 TA20UT NAND N 101103 R1142 SN74AHC1GOODCKR JL903 R1148 P7 6 TA3OUT Veo ge t e 120 5 7 7 TA3IN j 1106 1104 JL904 e 9 2200 470 R1132 lt lt B 150 49 ew V C enp M R1107 1505 5176 SN T146 R1120 SW5V S G SNET mins 01103 H W 1913 e T
183. RAMIC CHIP 6 3V C836 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C837 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 6 3V C838 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C839 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 25V C840 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C841 1 126 947 11 ELECT 16V C842 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C843 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C844 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C845 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C846 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C847 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C848 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C849 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C850 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C851 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V 0852 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C853 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 35V 0854 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 35V 0855 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C856 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C861 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C862 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C863 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 16V C864 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 8 4 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1 0 1 0 1 47 0 01uF 10uF 10uF 100uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1 0 1uF 0 1 100uF 47uF 0 1uF 0 1 0 1uF 100PF 0 1uF 47 0 1uF 0 1 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1 100 0 1 47uF 0 1uF 1uF 1uF 220PF 220PF 220PF 220PF 220PF 220PF 220PF 220PF 100PF 100PF 100PF 100PF 1uF 1uF 1uF 1uF 1090 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
184. RDR HX920 HX920 HX 20 HX122 HX720 HX727 HX920 HX929 SERVICE MANUAL Self Diagnosis _ SHOWVIEW RMT D230P D231P AEP Model RDR HX520 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 UK Model RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX725 for RDR HX520 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 57 gt gt for 525 725 DVD ReWritable VIDEO R RW aise 8 GEMSTAR Photo RDR HX525 for RDR HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 SPECIFICATIONS System Inputs and outputs General Laser Semiconductor laser LINE 2 OUT Power requirements 220 240 V AC 50 Channel coverage AUDIO Phono jack 2 Vrms 10 kilohms 60 Hz PAL B G D K D VHF E2 to E12 R1 to R12 Italian A to H Ireland A to J South Africa 4 to 13 UHF E21 to E69 R21 to R69 B21 to B69 CATV S01 to 505 S1 to 520 HYPER 521 to 541 SECAM L for French RDR HX520 HX725 HX727 HX920 and RDR HX925 models only VHF F2 to F10 UHF F21 to F69 CATV France B to Q HYPER 521 to S41 The above channel coverage merely ensures the channel reception within these ranges It does not guarantee the ability to receive signals in all circumstances For details see Receivable channels Video reception Frequency synthesizer system Audio reception Split carrier system Aerial out 75 ohm asymmetrical aerial socket Timer Clock Quartz locked Timer indication 24 hour cycle digital Power back up duration 1 hour Vi
185. Select mode different from the original recording in Dub Mode in the steps of Dubbing a single title Title Dubbing page 74 or Dubbing multiple titles Dub Selected Titles page 75 When dubbing multiple titles all of the selected titles will be recorded in same recording mode Hint Dubbing in the recording mode of the source title smoothes out the seams that are left over from editing Notes For a title whose picture size 16 9 or 4 3 is mixed When dubbed from the HDD to DVD RWs DVD Rs Video mode the picture size is determined by the setting in DVD Rec Picture Size page 46 When dubbed from the HDD to DVD RWs DVD Rs Video mode in LP EP or SLP mode the picture size is always 4 3 When dubbed from HDD to DVD RW or DVD R the picture size is always 4 3 The picture quality will not improve even if a title is converted to a recording mode of better picture quality Dubbing multiple titles Dub Selected Titles A maximum of 30 selected titles can be dubbed at once 1 Insert the DVD that you are going to dub to or from 2 Press HDD or DVD to select the source 3 Press TITLE LIST Press gt to switch the Title Lists if necessary 4 Press OPTIONS to select Dub Selected Titles and press ENTER 5 Select titles in the order you want to dub and press ENTER The titles are numbered in the selected order cancel the selecti
186. T CHIP 47uF 20 0336 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C1006 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 1090 520 725 727 920 925 1008 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 1090 0337 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C1009 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 1090 520 725 727 920 925 61010 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C338 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 520 725 727 920 925 61011 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 0339 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16 C1012 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 61013 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 61014 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 0340 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V 61015 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 1090 520 725 727 920 0501 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 20 6 3V C1028 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP uF 10 C502 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 C1029 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20 C505 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C1030 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 1090 0506 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 61031 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 61032 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 1090 0601 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16 0602 1 137 710
187. TE COMMANDER RMT D231P HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 REMOTE COMMANDER RMT D230P HX520 HX720 HX722 HX920 CORD POWER AEP CONTROLLER VIDEO AV MOUSE HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 CORD CONNECTION PAL CORD POWER UK MANUAL INSTRUCTION FRENCH HX520 AEP MANUAL INSTRUCTION GERMAN HX520 AEP MANUAL INSTRUCTION ITALIAN HX520 AEP MANUAL INSTRUCTION DUTCH HX520 AEP MANUAL INSTRUCTION SPANISH HX520 AEP MANUAL INSTRUCTION PORTUGUESE HX720 AEP HX722 HX920 MANUAL INSTRUCTION DANISH HX720 AEP HX722 HX920 MANUAL INSTRUCTION SWEDISH HX720 AEP HX722 HX920 MANUAL INSTRUCTION FINNISH HX720 AEP HX722 HX920 MANUAL INSTRUCTION FRENCH HX725 AEP HX727 HX925 MANUAL INSTRUCTION GERMAN HX725 AEP HX727 HX925 MANUAL INSTRUCTION ITALIAN HX725 AEP HX727 HX925 MANUAL INSTRUCTION DUTCH HX725 AEP HX727 HX925 MANUAL INSTRUCTION SPANISH HX725 AEP HX727 HX925 MANUAL INSTRUCTION ENGLISH HX525 HX725 UK MANUAL INSTRUCTION ENGLISH HX520 UK HX720 UK Note The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified 8 18E RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 Sony Corporation 9 883 909 11 Home Electronics Network Company 132 Published Quality Dept
188. TIONS and select PDC VPS Scan Off To ensure that the PDC VPS function works properly turn off the recorder before the timer recording starts This will automatically turn on the PDC VPS channel scan function while the recorder remains off Rec Mode Adjust If there is not enough available disc space for the recording the recorder automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded Set Rec Mode Adjust of the Timer Settings to in the Recording setup page 93 Unrecordable pictures Pictures with copy protection cannot be recorded on this recorder When the recorder receives a copy guard signal the recorder continues to record but only a blank grey coloured screen will be recorded Copy control Recordable discs signals Copy Free HDD EB GUT EL ES Em Copy Once HDD CPRM EB 9 Copy Never blank screen is recorded The recorded disc can be played only on compatible equipment page 8 Auto Title Erase HDD only If there is not enough space for a timer recording the recorder automatically erases old titles recorded on the HDD The oldest played title is erased Set Auto Title Erase of the Timer Settings to On in the Recording setup page 93 Protected titles are not erased If the timer settings overlap Overlapped timer settings are shown as follows Timer
189. The following titles in the HDD cannot be moved Protected titles Playlist titles Original titles referenced from the playlist When dubbing Move is stopped partway part of the title will be moved to the dubbing target However note that this will decrease the free disc space for DVD Rs DVD Rs Even if you erase a scene that contains copy protection signal the recording restrictions on that title are retained CPRM compatible DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode only 5 Z Indicates titles containing Copy Once copy protection signals page 73 When you select title with 2 the display asks for confirmation To Move select OK 6 Order of dubbing 6 Repeat step 5 to select all of the titles you want to dub 7 Select OK and press ENTER The display for selecting the dubbing mode appears 8 Select a dubbing mode using Fast Original gt gt HSP SP t sip ep lt Lp lt esp isp From the HDD to a DVD only Appears when available for the title page 71 9 Select Start and press ENTER The remaining time of dubbing appears in the front panel display To automatically adjust the dubbing mode If there is not enough available space on the target disc the recorder automatically selects a dubbing mode with lower picture quality according to the available space The same dubbing mode is set for all of the titles If
190. V SLICE OUT 0708 54 Y CVBS Cy Cb OUT CVBS Cb OUT MSD601 RST1 w 7 R738 13 22 0709 MSD601 RST1 Y G R740 13 22 07 0720 47u AVREGFIL 2 5VREGFIL VCC CVBS 16702 VIDEO IN OUT 1 702 LA73036M TBA E OFFSET CTL1 WIDE SEL2 WIDE SEL1 c2 GND C vcc CVBS OUT vec 0714 STZ6 8N T146 TU VIDEO gt D rou gt AUGND gt 32 0724 STZ6 8N T146 4 AU0UTL C OUT GND S Y OUT OFFSET CTL2 C Y OUT VCC Cb OUT VCC CrOUT 25V R785 B 0 C730 22u 25V B B B B B 2w R751 2200 50 0710 4 RECVY RECCCR 744 47 25V C745 470 25V MSD601 RST1 CB B XP VMUTE 0703 1SR154 400TE 25 D704 1SR154 400TE 25 J UNSW 8V V gt gt 1701 22uH 10701 TK72233CMCL G R742 13 22 07 1704 10uH 791 2W 752 2200 UNSWSV V lt YQ 41750 0715 2581197 1 146 8 5V SWITCH C701 47 380 R716 100k C703 R744 22 w 7 3 CR R VOUT EE
191. V XLMUTE a 1 Reis Ea Y G 1 digo 603 27 p 13 1717 GND V i AINL 7191 5 120 mo CB B x 1 2 COUT 2 067 gt MSB7OO RTI BUEFER GND V AV 103 i AGND gt 4 3 AUGND 5 BOARDED 1 lt lt nS 6 vioeosv PAGE 4 15 1 AINR 5 AINR Bo g m 6 AUGND euo v SN74HCTOBAPWR AOUTR 7 AoUTR BUFFER m H RECCCR 1 5 0 AOUTR gt 8 AOUTR Fons GND V 0 9 AUGND fe 1 R643 Your 2 0 T RECVY TX 0 12 9 0 A0UTL gt 519 110 0602 RISMSTATUSI e 0 AOUTL 2 1111 AouTL CN602 21 6 MSB709 RT1 hi mon 0 Swasv 112 swasv 21 i ITREQ m pr Ome 71637 13 SPD GND A 103 20 GND V 0 ARP 14 SPDIFO BOARD 2 8 Y G 41638 CN502 1 RB601 R646 15 IT XRST5 4 8 616 GND V 1 1004 0 1639 i 190116 scu CB B neor pi 1 17 11 5 12 gt GND V JL641 gt 18 17 5145 067 Y JL642 0603 ES 1192119 17 50075 TO 1 7 TETS 20 RISM_STATUS1 BOARD 6 8 1 C614 020014 31644 CN501 1 odu 6 3 4 B 50V 155 21 RISM_STATUS2 2 4 15 1 tov gt 46 22 RISM RTS 0 M RECCCR 9 31646 ie H 23 0 1 24 DGND 16606 1647 8909 13 RECVY V Hn S 80828CNNB B8NT2G 1625 Lo figa ze 25 v Reca anov
192. VIDEO H H 1 3 Vp p 5 702 s vIDEO v D 1 7 Vp p 5 1 Vp p 62 5 ns 6 4702 VIDEO 1 0 4 4 AV 103 1 8 POWER REF NO SERIES NO MARK REC PB MODE RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 PS102 ante ae 0 63A l CN101 15 Yo gt UNSWS5V V R160 UNSW18V 1 MEN us 22 GND V 1 roter Pg e 0 UNSW12V 2 iM UNSW 8V V GND GND 4 RZ gt UNSW 8V V GND 5 22 GND V N 2 toa NSw6v 6 279 5 UNSW6V A SWITCHING NSW6V 7 AW E UNSW12V A REGULATOR R154 Swsv 8 0 4 40 SW5V UNSW12V A NSW4V UNSW6V A NSW4V UNSW 8V A 3 gt GND A NSWAV XRMUTE GND XLMUTE UNSW 8V VA_PCONT 4 5 8 DET 5 s SS CN103 3P W UNSW6V I R144 OUT e 9 0 JL121 Ci17 22 GND V FAN DET 2 NEU Ies pet t 100p FAN DRIVE UNSWSV REG RTS GND 3 02 e gt GND I IC104 W gt gt UNSW5V I 146 i
193. VIDEOS VIDEO CDs Some playback operations of DVD VIDEOs VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software producers Since this recorder plays DVD VIDEOs VIDEO CDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed some playback features may not be available See the instructions supplied with the DVD VIDEOs VIDEO CDs Region code DVD VIDEO only Your recorder has a region code printed on the rear of the unit and will only play DVD VIDEOS playback only labelled with identical region codes This system is used to protect copyrights DVD VIDEOS labelled on this recorder If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO the message Playback prohibited by region code will appear on the TV screen Depending on the DVD VIDEO no region code indication may be labelled even though playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by area restrictions will also play Music discs encoded with copyright protection technologies This product is designed to play back discs that conform to the Compact Disc CD standard Recently various music discs encoded with copyright protection technologies are being marketed by some record companies Please be aware that among those discs there are some that do not conform to the CD standard and may not be playable by this product gt 9 Note on DualDiscs A DualDisc is a two sided disc product which mates DVD recorded material on one side with digital audio material
194. W VR mode will automatically be finalised after recording is finished You can play back a previously recorded title on the HDD while One Touch Dubbing is in progress Notes You cannot make a recording while DV dubbing The DV IN jack is for input only It will not output signals You cannot use the DV IN jack when signal input to the DV IN jack on the front panel or recorder operation cannot be performed correctly when using a digital video camera see About i LINK on page 107 Connect the camera to the LINE IN jack and follow the instructions of Recording from connected equipment without a timer on page 51 the input signal is not in DVC SD format Do not connect a MICRO MV format digital video camera even if it has an i LINK jack the images on the tape contain copy protection signals which limit recording If you want to play the disc on other DVD equipment finalise the disc page 36 Hookups DVD recorder Signal flow 1 Press HDD or DVD to select the recording destination If you select DVD insert a disc see 1 Inserting a Disc on page 27 2 Insert the source DV Digital8 format tape into your digital video camera For the recorder to record or edit your digital video camera must be set to video playback mode Buiqqng gt continued 77 Notes When a blank space between the recordings on the ta
195. W VR mode at a recording mode that is SP or lower and 2x speed or higher disc you can play the title as itis being recorded by selecting the programme title on the Title List page 57 Notes Ifa message indicating that the disc is full appears on the screen change the disc or make available space for the recording HDD DVD RW DVD RW only page 65 Check that the clock is correctly set before setting the timer recording If not the timer recording cannot be made To record a satellite programme turn on the satellite tuner and select the satellite programme you want to record Leave the satellite tuner turned on until the recorder finishes recording If you connect equipment with a timer function you can use the Synchro Rec function page 49 Even if the timer is set for the same daily or weekly programme the timer recording cannot be made if it overlaps with a programme that has priority will appear next to the overlapped setting in the Timer List Check the priority order of the settings Even the timer is set timer recordings cannot be made while recording a programme that has priority Rec Mode Adjust function only works with a timer recording and the PDC VPS function set to off It does not function with Quick Timer Synchro Rec In addition the Rec Mode Adjust function does not work when recording to the HDD while Auto Title Erase of the Timer Settings i The beginning of some
196. X727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 TXI1 D AUDIO ADC DAC SCLK 1 AINR FSEL AINR A768FS48K ZFLANR x 768 548 2 8 A768FS441K 768 5441 lt ZFUANE AOLRCKI AINL 2 lt lt swasy 2 TO 5 7 04 TO 1 7 04 AODATAI ALRCKO C817 10V ABCKO A RUN AOUTL 5 0 AOUTL AOUTL 2 5 R840 SW3 4V AOUTR AMY AOUTR C804 2 10 L 0805 AOUTR W AOUTR 10 0 F 25 deo dh R842 6 3V 0 GND gt gt gt AGND C812 C813 0220 10 16V PLL AUDIO AD DA 4 37 4 38 RD 060 7 7 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 SWITCHING REGULATOR SRV 1858EK D101 S1WBA60B RECT 0112 680 250 102 0 1 250 1102 3 LFT R102 220 C103 1 2W 100P 250V 7102 A C104 DSP 501N 100 1101 250 2101 S10K300 s o AC IN R101 2 2M 1 2W C101 0 1u 250V F101 T3 15A 250V CN101 2P SWITCHING REGULATOR SRV 1858EK T101
197. X727 HX925 models only R6 size AA batteries 2 Specifications and design are subject to change without notice Compatible colour systems This recorder is designed to record using the PAL colour system and play back using the PAL or NTSC colour systems For French RDR HX520 HX725 HX727 HX920 and RDR HX925 models only The signals of the SECAM colour system can be received or recorded but played back in the PAL colour system only Recording of video sources based on other colour systems cannot DVD RECORDER e ON Y WARNING WHEN SERVICING DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER EXIT WITH THE EYE TOO CLOSELY IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION BE SURE TO OBSERVE FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK UP BLOCK CAUTION The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye hazard CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT SAFETY RELATED COMPONENT WARNING COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY Unleaded solder Boards re
198. X925 FB110 1 469 670 21 FERRITE SMD 2012 C701 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20 6 3V C702 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V FB111 1 400 794 21 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 FB112 1 400 794 21 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 C703 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V FB602 1 400 794 21 FERRITE SMD 1608 C704 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V FB603 1 400 794 21 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 C705 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01 10 16V FB604 1 400 794 21 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 C706 1 164 849 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 5PF 50V C707 1 164 849 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 5PF 50V FB605 1 400 794 21 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 FB606 1 469 084 21 FERRITE C708 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V C710 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V FLUORESCENT INDICATOR C711 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V C712 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V FL501 1 234 867 11 FILTER EMI REMOVAL SMD 0713 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16 FL702 1 234 867 11 FILTER EMI REMOVAL SMD FL801 1 234 867 11 FILTER EMI REMOVAL SMD C714 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V C715 1 125 837 91 CERAMIC CHIP 1 10 6 C716 1 112 001 81 CERAMIC CHIP 270 590 50V C803 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20 6 3V C804 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20 6 3V 8 13 Remarks 10V 16V 50V 50V 16V 16V 16V 6 3V 16V 6 3V 10V 16V 10V 10V 10V 10V
199. Y TV Canal Plus Analogue Decoder Setting PAY TV Canal Plus ENTER analogue programme positions aes Sean You can watch or record PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder programmes if you connect a Ur s E ae decoder not supplied to the recorder Disconnect the recorder s mains lead from the mains 3 P to veins S w when connecting the decoder Note that when you set Line3 Input to Decoder in step 5 of receive positions using the ee Setting PAY TV Canal Plus analogue programme positions page 25 you will not be able on screen display EET s to select 1 3 because Line 3 will become a dedicated line for the decoder E Svoo order to set the programme positions RGB Decoder correctly sure to follow of the steps s Connecting a decoder below 5 Press 4110 select Video or RGB 2 for Linet Output Decoder for Line3 Input and Video for Line3 2 PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder Number 000 Output and press ENTER Aerial cable supplied buttons Video setup display appears again 006060 6 Press 47 RETURN to return the cursor AERA C to the left column to SYSTEM
200. al Recording of DVD Rec Settings to either Main default or Sub in the Recording setup page 93 The chapter marks in the dubbing source are not retained in the dubbed title When Auto Chapter is set to in the Recording setup chapter marks are automatically inserted at approximately 6 minute intervals Hints When you dub a Playlist title it is recorded as an Original title When dubbed from a DVD to the HDD the picture size and the sound types originally recorded are retained Moving a Playlist title Change Order You can change the Playlist title order within the Title List Playlist 1 Press TITLE LIST If the Title List Original appears press lt 2 Press OPTIONS to select Change Order and press ENTER Change Order Select Pe tile whose order you want to change 3 Select the title you want to move and press ENTER select a new location for the title using 4 and press ENTER The title moves to the new location To move more titles go to step 3 To finish select Quit and press ENTER Bunip3 pue gt 69 Notes You cannot make a recording while dubbing To play a dubbed disc on other DVD equipment finalise the disc page 36 You cannot dub from DVD VIDEOs to the HDD Thumbnails that you have set for the originally recorded title page 30 will not be retained
201. als When playing a double layer DVD the video and audio may be momentarily interrupted at the point where the layers switch gt gt Notes Power Save mode does function when there is a timer setting with PDC VPS set to On in the Timer List even if Power save standby is set to On The SMARTLINK features are not available while the power is off when Power save standby is set to On To reduce the number of times that the fan turns on automatically set Power save standby to On Command Mode Changes the Command Mode of the recorder ifother DVD equipment is assigned the same Command Mode For details see If you have a Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD recorder on page 18 Registration Code Displays the registration code of DivX video files for this recorder For more information go to www divx com vod on the Internet Factory Setup Allows you to select the setup settings by group and return them to their default settings Note that all of your previous settings will be lost 1 Select Factory Setup in Others and press gt or ENTER The display for selecting a group of settings appears 2 Select the group of settings you want to return to default from Basic Video Audio Recording DVD Others Parental Control and All and press gt or ENTER 3 Select Start and press ENTER
202. anel display changes as follows programme position t 3 Select the desired audio signal when recording a bilingual programme to the HDD or DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode Press OPTIONS to select Line Audio Input and press ENTER Then select Bilingual and press ENTER For details about bilingual recording see page 41 4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode For details about the recording mode see page 40 5 Insert the source tape into the connected equipment and set to playback pause 6 Press REC This recorder starts recording L1 L2 L3 DV Recording From Connected Equipment HDD EG Gm e INPUT SELECT REC e c e REC MODE mnc Se STOP SYNCHRO REC Recording from connected equipment with a timer Synchro Rec You can set the recorder to automatically record programmes from connected equipment that has a timer function such as a satellite tuner Connect the equipment to the LINE 3 DECODER jack of the recorder page 23 When the connected equipment turns on the recorder starts recording a programme from the LINE 3 DECODER jack 1 Before recording select HDD or DVD If you select DVD insert a recordable DVD see 1 Inserting a Disc on page 27 2 Set Synchro Rec to Record to HDD or Record to DVD in the Recording setup page 93 gt continued 40 7 Press the pause or play
203. ant replay advance the recording Chasing Playback is possible from one minute or more after recording starts Even if you fast forward the recorded programme there will always be a time difference of about one minute or more between the recorded programme and the current TV broadcast Example Title Search 21 The number in parentheses indicates the total number of titles tracks etc 2 Press the number buttons to select the number of the title chapter track time code etc you want For example Time Search To find a scene at 2 hours 10 minutes and 20 seconds enter 21020 If you make a mistake select another number Press ENTER The recorder starts playback from the selected number Note Title Search is not applicable to the HDD Playing a previous recording while making another Simultaneous Rec and Play HDD 23 EB EIUS 01902 DATA Simultaneous and Play allows you to view a previously recorded programme while recording programmes Playback continues even if a timer recording starts Use this function as follows While recording to the HDD Play another title on the HDD Play a previously recorded programme on a DVD by pressing DVD While recording to a DVD Play a previously recorded programme on the HDD by pressing HDD While recording to a DVD RW VR mode Play another title on the same DVD RW VR mode disc gt 1 Sim
204. ard to discern And these functions may not work with some screen sizes When using the Sharpness function noise found in the title may become more apparent In this case it is recommended that you use the BNR function with the Sharpness function If the condition still does not improve set the Sharpness level to Off Adjusting the delay between the picture and sound AV SYNC HDD GUI DATA 1 Press 0 0 5 during playback to select Audio Settings and press ENTER 2 Select AV SYNC and press ENTER AV SYNC When the video is delayed this function delays the audio for synchronization with the video 0 to 120 milliseconds Larger numbers indicate a longer audio delay for synchronization with the video When dubbing to a VCR or other video recording equipment be sure to return this setting to 0 ms default 3 Press to adjust the setting and press ENTER 56 Example Play a DVD while recording to the HDD 1 while recording press DVD and insert the DVD into the recorder 2 Press TITLE LIST to display the DVD Title List 3 Select the title you want to play and press ENTER 4 Select Play from the sub menu and press ENTER Playback starts from the selected title Note You cannot play a DVD DivX video or VIDEO CD recorded in the NTSC colour system while recording on the HDD When playing a DivX video or VIDEO CD be s
205. ars with the following options The default settings are underlined 16 9 4 3 Letter Box 4 3 Pan Scan Note Depending on the disc 4 3 Letter Box may be selected automatically instead of 4 3 Pan Scan vice versa Component Out seue Selects whether or not to output video signals from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks Hinc Ves oup video Scar Seng Audio Pause Mode Ruiz Outputs the component video Recording PAL E x signals Select this when you Others Sereen Saver On E want to view progressive Easy Setup signals ott Outputs no signals Video Output Notes TV Type When you set Linel Output to RGB you Sets the picture size when playing back a title recorded from 16 9 size video page 46 ora 16 9 size commercial DVD video Select the playback picture size according to the type of connected TV wide screen wide mode TV or conventional 4 3 screen TV 16 9 Select this when connecting to a wide screen TV or TV with a wide mode function 4 3Letter Select this when connecting Box toa 4 3 screen TV Displays a wide picture with bands on the upper and lower portions of the screen 4 3 Pan Select this when connecting Scan to a 4 3 screen TV Automatically displays wide picture on the entire screen and cuts off the por
206. available when dubbing titles recorded in EP and SLP mode to DVD RWs and DVD4Rs HDD EXT 71775 EINE EX ET Dubbing a single title Title Dubbing 1 Insert the DVD that you are going to dub to or from 2 Press HDD or DVD to select the source 3 Press TITLE LIST Press to switch the Title Lists if necessary 4 Select a title and press ENTER The sub menu appears 5 Select Dubbing and press ENTER The display for selecting the dubbing mode appears Ifa title with 21 page 73 is selected in the title list a confirmation display is displayed To Move select OK Title Dubbing This title will be dubbed Set the dub mode 1 World Final Mode SP Dub Mede 590 5 4 sP21e8 Cancel 1 Size of the title approximate This is displayed in red when the size exceeds the available space on the dubbing target media 2 Direction of dubbing Available space on the disc to be dubbed approximate 4 Information about the title to be dubbed 5 Dubbing mode and the space that remains after dubbing approximate Notes High speed Dubbing is not available for the following titles Titles recorded HQ Titles that contain both main and sub sounds except DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode Titles recorded in mixed picture size 4 3 and 16 9 etc except DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mod
207. ble for the title page 71 8 Select Start and press ENTER remaining time of dubbing appears in the front panel display To automatically adjust the dubbing mode If there is not enough available space on the target disc the recorder automatically selects a dubbing mode with lower picture quality according to the available space If there is insufficient disc space in the selected dubbing mode the following display appears after step 8 Dubbing There not enough memory dubbing mode will be adjusted Do you want to continue Select OK and go to step 8 To manually select another dubbing mode select Cancel and go to step 7 To stop dubbing Press OPTIONS to select Stop Dubbing and press ENTER When asked for confirmation select OK and press ENTER When dubbing Move is stopped partway no part of the title will be moved to the dubbing target However note that this will decrease the free disc space for DVD Rs DVD Rs 6 Hint You can turn off the recorder during dubbing The recorder completes dubbing even after being turned off Rec Mode Conversion Dubbing HDD lt gt Ges lem Allows you to dub from the HDD to a DVD or vice versa in a dubbing mode that differs from the original recordings For example when you dub an HQ title data size is large in SP mode you can reduce the data size saving more titles using 1
208. buttons below see the illustration on page 52 For MP3 JPEG or DivX operations see Playing MP3 Audio Tracks JPEG Image Files or DivX video Files page 59 Buttons Operations AUDIO Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed repeatedly in normal playback mode HDD ENT Selects the language HDD EU Selects the sub sound ESN Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks SUBTITLE Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly DVD e e gt instant replay instant advance HDD CUTS LES KIDS EXT EN Replays the scene briefly fast forwards the scene 14 previous P next Goes to the beginning of the previous next title chapter scene track For the HDD you cannot go to the beginning of the previous next title 44 gt gt gt fast reverse fast forward Fast reverses fast forwards the disc when pressed during playback Search speed changes as follows fast reverse fast forward 44 442 GU When you press and hold the button fast forward fast reverse continues at the selected speed until you release the button 1 When you press once during playback of a title recorded in the you can play quickly with sound 1 3 appears 72 443 and 3p gt P gt are only available for the HDD and DVDs 4114005115 slow freeze frame
209. by pressing the TV DVD button on the remote If you disconnect the recorder s mains lead you will not be able to view the signals from the connected VCR gt 21 Connecting to Satellite Digital Tuner Connect a satellite or digital tuner to this recorder using the LINE 3 DECODER jack Disconnect recorder s mains lead from the mains when connecting the tuner DVD recorder EA signal flow Hint When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound connect to just and VIDEO input jacks on the front of the recorder Do not connect the R input jack Notes Do not connect the yellow LINE IN VIDEO jack when using an S video cord Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment s input jack with the other equipment s output jack connected to the input jack of this recorder This may cause noise feedback Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your at the same time 1 5 To use the Synchro Rec function see below Do NOT set Line3 Input of the Scart Setting to Decoder in the Video setup when making this connection A Satellite tuner TV CanalSat etc 8 2 S29 c 4 8 to SCART input SA SCART cord not supplied 2 to G LINE 1 TV 6600
210. c S602 2 SS eS r m FAIL 1 DETECT i DIGITAL d PS102 OUT Saipan IC802 IC803 FR 240 BOARD FR 159 BOARD SELECTOR 1 801 1 3002 IC3001 13001 5V REG UNSWSV V a VIDEOSV REMOTE COMMANDER LED DRIVE FLD DRIVER 1803 1 RECEIVER 1 23102 4 vour 5 16 3 1 1 5 0707 711 5 1 3 1 IC702 at m 1 BUFFER VIDEO ee 3 10701 SELECTOR 9 3 3V REG 1 K 0801 L702 L704 osc D3101 D3111 ND3001 50 UO 6 62 1701 5 3 08112 0801 T 1 5 29 t POWER DC DC CONVERTER 1 TRANSFORMER 3 7 3 8E FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 SECTION 4 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND PRINTED WIRING BOARDS 4 1 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
211. can be unplugged from the wall socket immediately in the event of trouble SuowViw is a registered trademark of Gemstar Development Corporation The Snow View system is manufactured under licence from Gemstar Development Corporation Disposal of Old Electrical amp Electronic Equipment Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste Instead it shall be handed over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources For more detailed information about recycling of this product please contact your local Civic Office your household waste disposal Service or the shop where you purchased the product Precautions This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits set out in the EMC Directive using a connection cable shorter than 3 metres On safety Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet unplug the recorder and have it checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further Ab
212. cillation selection signal SYNCIN Input composite video signal SVREF When slice the vertical synchronous signal input slice power TEST2 Fixed at GND VDD3 Power supply input Analog 5V CVINI Input of component video signal VSS3 Analog GND TEST3 Fixed at L TU AFTI Input of tuner ATF control signal 5 3 11 5 2 MAIN CONTROL 1 103 R8A34012BG RD 060 BOARD Function Input output of data 11 for DVD ATIDATA 12 Input output of data 12 for DVD ATIDATA 14 Input output of data 14 ATIDIOW Output of DVD write signal ATIINTRQ Input of IRQ signal HDREQ 0 Fixed at HWS 0 Output of write strove signal 0 HCS 1 Fixed at H HCS 4 Fixed at H HADRS 30 Output of address 30 HADRS 26 Output of address 26 HADRS 22 Output of address 22 HADRS 21 Output of address 21 HADRS 17 Output of address 17 HADRS 13 Output of address 13 HADRS 10 Output of address 10 7 O O O O IO O O O Output of address 7 MSDATA 0 Fixed at L MSDATA 3 Fixed at L SCLK 3 Not usedd CTS 1 Fixed at H TX 2 Output of UART CSIO GPIO RTS 1 Output of UART CSIO GPIO RTS 0 Output of UART CSIO GPIO DVDD Power supp
213. creen when output in progressive mode 50 or 60 frames per second the progressive video signal needs to be converted to match the type of DVD software that you are watching You can fine tune the progressive 525p 625p video signal that is output when you set Progressive Output to On Note that you must connect to a progressive format TV using the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks page 13 Auto Automatically detects the software type Film based or Video based and selects the appropriate conversion mode Normally select this position Video Fixes the conversion mode to the mode for Video based software Note When picture noise appears after you set the recorder to progressive format hold down and press PROGRAM minus on the unit Scart Setting Sets the method of inputting outputting signals from the SCART jacks on the rear panel of the recorder Select an option for each of the items below according to the combination of jacks and methods that you are going to use Line1 Output Selects a method of outputting video signals for the LINE 1 TV jack RGB Outputs RGB signals Video Outputs video signals S Video Outputs S video signals Audio Connection The following setup items switch the method of outputting audio signals when you connect component such as an amplifier receiver with a digital input jack For connection details see Step 3 Connecting
214. deo recording format MPEG 2 MPEG 1 Audio recording format applicable bit rate Dolby Digital 2 ch 256 kbps 128 kbps in EP and SLP mode VIDEO Phono jack 1 0 Vp p S VIDEO 4 pin mini DIN Y 1 0 Vp p C 0 3 Vp p PAL LINE 2 IN AUDIO Phono jack 2 Vrms more than 22 kilohms VIDEO Phono jack 1 0 Vp p S VIDEO 4 pin mini DIN Y 1 0 Vp p C 0 3 Vp p PAL LINE 1 TV 21 pin CVBS IN OUT S Video RGB OUT upstream LINE 3 DECODER 21 pin CVBS IN OUT S Video RGB IN RGB signal cannot be recorded except with French RDR HX520 HX725 HX727 HX920 and RDR HX925 models S Video OUT downstream Decoder DV IN 4 pin i LINK S100 DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL Phono jack 0 5 Vp p 75 ohms COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y Phono jack Y 1 0 0 7 0 7 G LINK mini jack for French RDR HX525 HX725 HX727 and RDR HX725 models only Power consumption RDR HX520 HX525 42 W RDR HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 44 W Dimensions approx 430 x 65 x 328 mm width heieht depth incl projecting parts Hard disk drive capacity RDR HX520 HX525 80 GB RDR HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 160 GB RDR HX920 HX925 250 GB Mass 4 2 Operating temperature 5 to 35 Operating humidity 25 to 80 Supplied accessories Mains lead 1 Aerial cable 1 Remote commander remote 1 Set top box controller 1 for French RDR HX525 HX725 H
215. e Dubbing from DVD to HDD Dubbing 16 9 size title from HDD to DVD RW DVD R When dubbing a title with a picture size of 16 9 recorded in LP EP or SLP mode toa DVD RW or DVD R in Video mode When dubbed to a DVD RW Video mode DVD RW DVD R DVD R Video mode the seams that are left over from editing may remain on the disc If you edit a title use the Original Dubbing or Rec Mode Conversion Dubbing method This will smooth out the seams Original Dubbing HDD EZB Gm i Original Dubbing allows you to make smooth dubbings by de emphasizing the seams that are left over from editing In this case the recording mode is set to the same recording mode that the source title was recorded in To set the Dub Mode to Original you must make your selection from the Dub Selected Titles display page 75 Note that you cannot select Original when using the Dubbing method explained in Dubbing a single title Title Dubbing page 74 Note If the recording mode of the dubbing source title is unknown when dubbing from a DVD to the HDD Dub Mode is automatically set to SP in the Dub Selected Titles display page 75 Select Dub Mode Select a dubbing mode using 4 4 SP LSP lt LP esp From the HDD to a DVD only Appears when High speed Dubbing is availa
216. e Titles and press ENTER The display for selecting titles to be erased appears Erase Tiles 1 LI Mystery Sun 24 3 Select a title and press ENTER A check mark appears in the check box next to the selected title To clear the check mark press ENTER again To clear all of check marks select Reset 4 Repeat step 3 to select all of the titles you want to erase Creating chapters manually HDD ES You can manually insert a chapter mark at any point you like during playback or recording Press CHAPTER MARK at the point where you want to divide the title into chapters Each time you press the button Marking appears on the screen and the scenes to the left and right of the mark become separate chapters To erase chapter marks You can combine two chapters by erasing the chapter mark during playback Press He to search for a chapter number and while displaying the chapter containing the chapter mark you want to erase press CHAPTER MARK ERASE The current chapter combines with the previous chapter Notes When dubbing any chapter marks you enter will be erased insert a chapter mark manually during recording set Auto Chapter to Off in the Recording setup 5 When you finish selecting titles select and press ENTER The list of the titles to be erased appears for confirmation To change the selection select Change and
217. e EEPROM device check will be executed The EEPROM device is checked whether it is mounted or not and the I2C communication between Rism3 IC103 and EEPROM is checked Key 2 is not used When the key 3 is pressed down the Video Dec device check will be executed The Video Dec device is checked whether it is mounted or not and the I2C communication between Rism3 IC103 and Video Dec is checked It is used for the AEP3 destination only When the key 4 is pressed down the DDR Data device check will be executed The DDR device is checked whether it is mounted or not and the electrical signal connection between Rism3 1C103 and DDR device is checked When the key 5 is pressed down IC603 of the AV board will be patched Never press the key 5 unless otherwise specified Check result display IC105 check result IC106 check result Display Message Meaning of Display DATA OK OK Both IC105 and IC106 are OK DATA OK NG IC105 OK IC106 NG NG No Good DATA NG OK IC105 NG IC106 OK DATA NG NG Both IC105 and IC106 are NG lt lt MAIN MENU gt gt 1 Version No 2 Display Color 3 Total Time 4 Error History 5 Command History 6 History Clear 7 Factory Set Up 8 Device Check 9 HDD MODE 0 G code Setting MODEL KKK SYSCON Version gt HDD Serial ID xx k Sony ID x gt lt lt Device check gt gt 1 EEPROM Check 2 Sup
218. e G gt LINE 1 jack set your TV to the TV input using the TV DVD button and select the programme you want to watch If your TV is connected to the LINE 2 OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks set the TV to TV input using the TV button page 17 TV Direct Rec If you are using the SMARTLINK connection you can easily record what you are watching on your TV When the TV is turned on press REC The recorder automatically turns on and starts recording what you are watching on the TV Note If TV appears in the front panel display you cannot turn off the TV or change the programme position during TV Direct Rec To turn off the function set Direct Rec to Off in the Recording setup page 93 About the Teletext function Some broadcast systems ensure a Teletext service in which the complete programmes and their data title date programme position recording start time etc are stored day by day When recording a programme the recorder automatically takes the programme name from the Teletext pages and stores it as the title name For details see Auto Programme Title Labelling TV Guide Page on page 86 Note that the Teletext information will not appear on your TV screen To view the Teletext information on your TV screen press TV DVD on the remote to switch the input source to your TV page 17 not available in some areas 3 Select a title and press ENTER The sub menu appears The sub
219. ear in the front panel display when the recorder is turned off Dimmer in the Others setup is set to Save Power page 96 Remote control The remote does not function gt Batteries are weak gt The remote is too far from the recorder gt The remote s manufacturer code returned to the default setting when you replaced the batteries Reset the code page 17 gt The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on the recorder gt Different command modes are set for the recorder and remote Set the same command mode page 18 The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3 gt Press stop on the unit while the recorder is turned off to check the current command mode Recording Timer recording Editing The programme position cannot be changed from the programme position you are recording gt Set the TV s input source to TV Recording does not start immediately after you press REC Operate the recorder only after LOAD FORMAT or INFOWRITE disappears from the front panel display Nothing was recorded even though you set the timer setting correctly There was a power failure during recording gt The recorder s internal clock stopped due to a power failure that lasted for more than 1 hour Reset the clock page 87 The channel was disabled after the timer recording was set See Channel Se
220. eated in DivX format The file has an extension other than avi or divx The DATA CD DivX video DATA DVD DivX video is not created in a DivX format that conforms to ISO 9660 Level 1 Level 2 or Joliet The DivX video file is larger than 720 width x 576 height The MP3 audio tracks do not play gt The MP3 audio tracks are not recorded in a format that the recorder can play page 59 The JPEG image files do not play The JPEG image files are not recorded in a format that the recorder can play page 59 Progressive JPEG images cannot be played TV Pause does not work You are recording to the HDD or the HDD is full Display The clock has stopped Set the clock again page 87 The clock stopped due to a power failure that lasted for more than 1 hour Reset the clock page 87 The TIMER REC indicator is flashing gt The disc does not have enough space gt Insert a recordable disc inside the recorder gt The inserted DVD is protected page 36 The recording mode indication is incorrect gt When the recording or dubbing is less than three minutes the recording mode indication may be displayed incorrectly The actual recording itself is correctly made in the selected recording mode gt After playing titles recorded in EP and SLP mode the recording mode indication may change depending on the recorded programme The clock does not app
221. ection explains basic functions Note that editing is irreversible To edit the HDD DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode without changing the original recordings create a Playlist title page 67 CHAPTER CHAPTER MARK MARK i C TITLE List w 4 1 RETURN lt lt 1 Press TITLE LIST For HDD titles or DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode press 4 amp amp e to switch the Title Lists if necessary 2 Select a title and press ENTER The sub menu appears 3 Select an option and press ENTER You can make the following edits to the title Erase Erases the selected title Select OK when asked for confirmation Protect Protects the title 8 appears next to the protected title Title Name Allows you to enter or re enter a title name page 34 Erase Erases a section of the title page 65 Divide Divides a title into two titles page 66 Dividing a title Divide If you want to dub long title to disc but do not want to reduce the picture quality divide the title into two shorter titles Note that dividing a title cannot be undone Only playlist titles can be divided for DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode HDD 1 Press TITLE LIST Press to switch the Title Lists if necessary 2 Select a title and press ENTER The sub menu appears 3 Select Divide and press ENTER The display for setting the dividing p
222. ent with strong magnets such as microwave ovens or large loudspeakers Do not place heavy objects on the recorder On recording Make trial recordings before making the actual recording On compensation for lost recordings Sony is not liable and will not compensate for any lost recordings or relevant losses including when recordings are not made due to reasons including recorder failure or when the contents of a recording are lost or damaged as a result of recorder failure or repair undertaken to the recorder Sony will not restore recover or replicate the recorded contents under any circumstances Copyrights Television programmes films video tapes discs and other materials may be copyrighted Unauthorized recording of such material may be contrary to the provisions of the copyright laws Also use this recorder with cable television transmission may require authorization from the cable television transmitter and or programme owner This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited Copy guard function Since the recorder has a copy guard function programmes received
223. er track or disc Also you can check the disc name recorded on the DVD CD 9 91888 14011 DISPLAY o ENTER OPTIONS Japs09ay GAG Gunyay TIME TEXT o Press DISPLAY The displays differ depending on the disc type or playing status 1 mas Angle3 5 1 English Dolby Digital 2 0 4 T TE BH 2 00045 02 Title number name Shows either track number track name scene number or file name for CDs VIDEO CDs DATA DVDs DATA CDs gt continued x 32 34 N Available functions for DVD VIDEOs 99 7 subtitle etc or playback data for DATA DVDs and DATA CDs 3 The current selected function or audio setting appears only temporarily Example Dolby Digital 5 1 ch Rear L R 1 English Dolby Digital 3 2 1 Front L R LFE Low Frequency Centre Effect The current selected angle Disc type format page 8 Title type only appears for Playlists Play mode Recording mode page 40 lt gt 00 IN Playing status 2 10 Title number chapter number 3 page 58 Shows either track number scene number album number 3 or file number for CDs VIDEO CDs DATA DVDs or DATA CDs 11 Album name appears
224. er AND Check Not used 3 Video Dec Device Check It is used for the AEP3 4 DDR Date Check destination only 5 IT Setting 6 5 Hard Disk Check Menu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 When key 1 15 pressed down ID check will executed as shown below Indicate ID HDD information read out MODEL Model name of the product Serial No HDD serial No Model No HDD model No F W Rev HDD software version When the key 2 is pressed down Performance Check will be executed as shown below Performance Check Power ON OFF test and Read Verify of all tracks When the key 3 is pressed down Write ID will be executed as shown below Write ID NOR Flash HDD information write When the key 4 is pressed down Format will be executed as shown below Format Full erase of HDD When the key 5 is pressed down Factory Check will be executed as shown below Factory Check Aging test in the same way as in the factory When the key 6 is pressed down the Write Registration Code will be executed as shown below Write Registration Code Writing the DIVX Registration Code When the RETURN key is pressed down the monitor display will return to the menu screen 6 4 lt lt HDD gt gt 1 ID Write ID Format Factory Check Write Registration Code RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 SES HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 ADJUST
225. er you have recorded or edited a DVD This is because the recorder is adding disc data to the disc The disc tray does not open and LOCKED appears in the front panel display gt The disc tray is locked Cancel the Child Lock page 53 The disc tray does not open and TRAY LOCKED appears in the front panel display gt Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility gt 103 104 106 disc tray does open and cannot remove the disc after you press amp open close Turn off the recorder Once the clock appears in the front panel display disconnect the mains lead If the recorder does not turn off or if the clock does not appear in the front panel display disconnect the mains lead anyway Connect the mains lead again while pressing down amp on the recorder and release the button when the disc tray opens Then keep on the recorder pressed for about ten seconds until WELCOME appears in the front panel display RECOVERY appears in the front panel display gt The recorder s recovery function was activated when the recorder was turned on because the power was turned off or failed during recording Leave the recorder on until RECOVERY disappears from the front panel display HDD ERROR appears in the front panel display gt The hard disk error occu
226. essed in the past Pressed buttons for 400 commands at a maximum can be stored Clearing the Error History and the Command History Returning the Set Ups of various functions to default Diagnostic checks in the Service Mode 6 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 6 4 1 2 3 4 5 Items and Description of Service Mode Menu When the key 1 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the Version No check menu screen When the key 2 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the Display Color check menu screen When the key 3 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the Total Time check menu screen When the key 4715 pressed down the monitor display moves to the Error History check menu screen When the key 5 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the Command History check menu screen When the key 6 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the History Clear check menu screen When the key 7 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the Factory Set Up check menu screen When the key 8 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the hard disk check menu screen When the key 9 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the hard disk check menu screen When the key 0 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the G code Setting menu screen Device Check Menu Diagnostic Test When the key 1 is pressed down th
227. ety Replace only with part number specified RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 4 3 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS R D 060 B OAR D S D Uses unleaded solder RD 060 BOARD SIDE A CN101 B 1 CN601 1 CN603 4 CN604 3 CN701 E 5 D503 D 3 10103 10105 0 2 2 C 1 1 1 ME LEH m TUB gt m 1 J SSIES oT 4 b Y Y y Y nnn nnn ae OO A Od 4 222222222222 2222 1 4 wes 20707274 8 13 4444 ae ead fr E A Puget 311 Oe RISM3 VDEC A V INTERFACE AUDIO DAC ADC 4 41 4 42 RD 060 RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 RD 060 BOARD SIDE B hr Uses unleaded solder RD 060 BOARD SIDE B 10101 5 C C C2 Co gt TELE gt RISM3 VDEC A V INTERFACE AUDIO DAC ADC RD 060 4 43 4 44E RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 SECTION 5 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 5 1 IT CONTROL 603 M306H
228. f CD Extras DVD ROMs DVD RWs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD Rs that do not contain DVD Video DivX video or JPEG image files 8 cm DVD RW DVD RW and DVD R recorded with a DVD video camera Still images recorded with a DVD video camera cannot be played DVD Audio discs DVD RAMs HD layer on Super Audio CDs DVD VIDEOs with a different region code page 11 DVDs that were recorded on a different recorder and not correctly finalised Usable disc versions as of March 2006 8x speed or slower DVD RWs 6x speed or slower DVD RWs Ver 1 1 Ver 1 2 with 16x speed or slower DVD Rs 16x speed or slower DVD Rs 2 0 Ver 2 1 with 3 8x speed or slower DVD R DL Double Layer discs DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DVD R DL and DVD R are trademarks 1 When an unformatted DVD R is inserted into this recorder it is automatically formatted in Video mode To format a new DVD R in VR mode format using the Disc Information display page 27 2 CPRM Content Protection for Recordable Media is a coding technology that protects copyrights for images Discs that cannot be recorded on 8 cm discs DVD R DL Dual Layer discs Maximum recordable number of titles Disc Number of titles HDD 300 DVD RW DVD R 99 DVD RW DVD R 49 DVD R DL 49 The maximum length for one title is eight hours Note on playback operations of DVD
229. g the disc After finalising the disc will be ejected automatically 3 Select OK and press ENTER The recorder starts finalising the disc After finalising the disc will be ejected automatically Hint By reformatting you can change the recording format on DVD RWs or record again on DVD RWs that have been finalised Note On this model 1 GB read gigabyte is equivalent to billion bytes The larger the number the larger the disc space Finalising the disc using Disc Information display 1 insert a disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 27 2 Press OPTIONS to select Disc Information and press ENTER The Disc Information display appears 3 Select Finalise and press ENTER The display shows the approximate time required for finalising and asks for confirmation Finalise About min needed to finalise this disc Cannot cancel finalisation once it has started Do you still wish to proceed 4 Select and press ENTER The recorder starts finalising the disc Hint can check whether the disc has been finalised or not If you cannot select Finalise in step 3 above the disc has already been finalised Notes Depending on the condition of the disc recording or the DVD equipment discs may not play even if the discs are finalised The recorder may not be able to finalise the disc if it was recorded
230. gnals for the LINE 3 DECODER jack Video Outputs video signals S Video Outputs S video signals Pause Mode HDD DVDs only Selects the picture quality in pause mode Auto The picture including RN subjects that move dynamically is output with no jitter Normally select this position Frame The picture including subjects that do not move dynamically is output in high resolution Sjueunsnipy pue gt 89 MPEG DVD VIDEOs only Selects the type of MPEG audio signal PCM Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component without a built in MPEG decoder If you play MPEG audio sound tracks the recorder outputs stereo signals via the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL jack MPEG Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component with a built in MPEG decoder DTS DVD VIDEOs only Selects whether or not to output DTS signals On Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component with a built in Dolby Digital D PCM DTS decoder we DIS EIE Off Select this when the recorder 2 Select Digital Out and press ENTER is connected to an audio component without a built in DTS decoder 48kHz 96kHz PCM DVD VIDEOs only digital circuit upon the analogue circuit is minimal 3 Select On and press ENTER 4 Set the digital outpu
231. grammed To stop during recording Press REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording Buiqqng gt continued 81 1 Select Channel Setting in Basic and press ENTER Basic Channel Seting Aus Prog Stem Chama ame PAG Aue T BG ci 2 DK 3 BG cs On 2 Press to select the programme position and press ENTER Basic Channel Setting AFE Prog System Channel BAKRU Audo AFT T BS g 2 sr coe 0 On 3 BG 6 NICAM 3 Select the item you want to change using 4 and press ENTER Basic Channel Seting seme Prog System Channel Name EAR Amo IS EE Ci AA Om Recording 2 s cor on J 090 OSD Ex _ On ESET preset another programme position repeat from step 2 System Channel Setting Presets programme positions manually If some programme positions could not be set using the Easy Setup function you can set them manually If there is no sound or if the picture is distorted the wrong tuner system may have been preset during Easy Setup Set the correct tuner system
232. he sound is not clear when listening to NICAM broadcasts set Audio to Standard see Channel Setting on page 83 Hint You can select the audio main or sub while recording bilingual programmes using the AUDIO button This does not affect the recorded sound 4 Select and press ENTER The TIMER LIST display page 47 appears The TIMER REC indicator lights up on the front panel and the recorder is ready to start recording Unlike a VCR there is no need to turn off the recorder before the timer recording starts To stop recording during timer recording Press REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording About the PDC VPS function PDC VPS signals are transmitted with TV programmes in some broadcast systems These signals ensure that timer recordings are made regardless of any broadcast delays early starts or broadcast interruptions To use the PDC VPS function Set PDC VPS to in step 3 above When you turn on this function the recorder starts scanning the channels before the timer recording starts If you are watching TV when scanning starts a message will appear on the TV screen If you want to watch TV Switch to your TV s tuner or turn off the PDC VPS channel scan function Note that if you turn off the PDC VPS channel scan function the timer recording will not start To temporarily turn off PDC VPS channel scan Press OP
233. he Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers i LINK baud rate LLINK s maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment Three maximum baud rates are defined 5100 approx 100 Mbps S200 approx 200 Mbps S400 approx 400 Mbps The baud rate is listed under Specifications in the instruction manual of each equipment It is also indicated near the i LINK jack on some equipment The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is 5100 When units connected equipment having a different maximum baud rate the baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate What is Mbps Mbps stands for megabits per second or the amount of data that can be sent or received in one second For example a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in one second jeuontppy 105 jeuonippy continued 107 108 110 i LINK functions this details how to dub when this recorder is connected to other video equipment having DV jacks see page 77 The DV jack on this recorder can only input DVC SD signals It cannot output signals The DV jack will not accept MICRO MV signals from equipment such as a MICRO MV digital video camera with an LLINK jack For further precautions see the notes on page 77 For details on precautions when connecting this recorder also see
234. he picture MNR mosquito noise reduction Reduces the faint noise appearing around the outlines of the images The noise reduction effects are automatically adjusted within each setting range according to the video bit rate and other factors Sharpness Sharpens the outlines of the images PB Video Equalizer Playback video equalizer Adjusts the picture in greater detail Select an item and press ENTER Contrast changes the contrast Brightne hanges the overall brightness Colour makes the colours deeper or lighter Hue changes the colour balance 3 Press to adjust the setting and press ENTER The default settings are underlined weak Off 1 2 3 strong BNR weak Off 1 2 strong MNR weak Off 1 2 strong Sharpness weak Off 1 2 3 strong PB Video Equalizer Contrast weak 3 0 3 strong Brightness dark 3 0 3 bright Colour light 3 0 3 deep Hue red 3 0 3 green Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust any other items 1 softens the outlines of the images enhances the outlines and 3 enhances them more than 2 yaegheld gt continued 55 Notes If the outlines of the images on your screen become blurred set BNR and or MNR to Off Depending on the disc or the scene being played the above BNR MNR or FNR effects may be h
235. he recording time Recording a programme with poorreception or a programme or video source of low picture quality Recording on a disc that has already been edited Recording only still picture or just sound 1 Press Sette recording dato or VIDEO Ps Code Dw aT Today 19 82 20 52 Mode Meds pocnes 5 0 om 2212 2 Press 4 4 to select the Day and Time or Mode row Then press ENTER 3 Select an item using lt gt and adjust using 4 Then press ENTER To make additional changes to items in different rows return to step 2 The adjustable items are listed below Day and Time Sets the date start time and stop time and selects the programme position or input source The date item changes as follows Today lt Sat 28 10 30 days later Sun every Sunday Sat every Saturday lt Mon Fri Monday to Friday lt Mon Sat Monday to Saturday Daily Today Mode Selects the recording mode page 40 Media Selects the media HDD or DVD PDC VPS Sets the PDC VPS function See About the PDC VPS function below Extend Time Sets the duration in increments of 10 minutes for a maximum of 60 minutes when a timer recording is in progress If the programme set to be recorded daily or weekly is extended the manually extended time set here will be added to the subsequent
236. ically gt If the DVD has an auto pause signal the recorder stops playback at the auto pause signal Some functions such as Stop Search or Slow motion Play cannot be performed gt Depending on the DVD you may not be able to do some of the operations above See the instruction manual supplied with the disc The language for the sound track cannot be changed Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVD being played The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of the language for the sound track gt Try changing the language using the DVD VIDEO s menu subtitle language cannot changed or turned off gt Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the DVD VIDEO The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the subtitles gt Try changing the subtitle using the DVD VIDEO s menu gt The subtitles cannot be changed for the titles recorded on this recorder Recording from the equipment with a timer Nothing was recorded even though you set the Synchro Rec setting correctly gt You forgot to turn off the connected equipment Turn off the connected equipment and set the recorder to Synchro Rec standby mode page 49 gt The recorder was not set to Synchro Recording standby mode Press gt SYNCHRO REC to have the recorder stand by for recording Make sure the SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on the front panel page 49 The equipment is not connected to the LINE 3
237. ighlight scenes as a Playlist title You can even rearrange the scene order within the Playlist title The Playlist title calls up data from the original titles for playback When an original title is used for a Playlist title the original title cannot be edited and erased Bunip3 pue uise13 Playlist Note Playlist titles containing titles recorded with the Copy Once copy protection signal cannot be dubbed or moved page 73 gt 67 68 70 1 Press TITLE LIST If the Title List Original appears press 2 Press OPTIONS to select Create Playlist and press ENTER Create a Playlist ttio s 7 3 Select Select and press ENTER Tile selection Select a Sm 24 World 30 3 4 Select the title you want to include in the Playlist title and press ENTER The display for setting the start point IN appears The title starts to play To return to the beginning of the title press M and then press 44 CresteaPlayist 1 World Sports Set Npoint Total 01026 Preview 5 Select the IN point using lt lt gt gt and press ENTER Playback pauses 6 Press
238. in the dubbed title When dubbing to a DVD R DL disc the video may be momentarily interrupted at the point where the layers switch About Dub Mode With this recorder the recording mode for dubbing is displayed as Dub Mode Three dubbing methods are available High speed Dubbing Original Dubbing and Rec Mode Conversion Dubbing Read the following and select according to the required time disc space and picture quality Dubbing at high speed High speed Dubbing HDD gt aum m e Allows you to dub what you have stored in the HDD to a high speed DVD 8x speed DVD RWs 6x speed DVD RWs 16x speed DVD Rs 16x speed DVD Rs or slower versions of each disc type without changing the recording mode Set Dub Mode to Fast in the steps of Dubbing a single title Title Dubbing page 74 or Dubbing multiple titles Dub Selected Titles page 75 When dubbing multiple titles you can select Fast if there are one or more titles that can be dubbed at high speed in the selected titles However titles that cannot be dubbed at high speed are dubbed in the Original Dubbing mode The minimum required time is as follows approximate gt 71 72 74 Required times High speed Dubbing from HDD to DVD for 60 minute programme TTM Speed 6 6x 8x 8x 2 4 High High Rec speed speed mode DVD DVD RW
239. inalisation DVD R necessary page 36 DVD R DL VIDEO Format in VR mode page 27 Playable only on DVD R in VR Formatting VR mode compatible players mode performed finalisation necessary using the Disc page 36 ovo tint 47 display Video Automatically Playable on most DVD EI formatted in players finalisation mode Video mode necessary page 36 Playable discs VIDEO DVD VIDEO DVD DVD Discs such as movies that can be purchased or rented This recorder also recognizes DVD R Dual Layer Video mode discs as DVD Video compatible discs 0153 DIGITAL VIDED VIDEO CD VIDEO CDs or CD Rs CD RWs in VIDEO CD Super VIDEO CD format COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO Music CDs or CD Rs CD RWs music CD format DATA DVD DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD ROMs containing either JPEG image files or DivX video files DATA CD DATA CD CD ROMs CD Rs CD RWs containing either MP3 audio tracks JPEG image files or DivX video files 8 cm DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DVD VIDEO and CD are trademarks DivX DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of DivX Inc and are used under license DivX is a video file compression technology developed by DivX Inc Discs that cannot be played PHOTO CDs CD ROMs CD Rs CD R Ws that are recorded in a format different from the formats mentioned in the table above Data part o
240. ing the IN point start of the scene appears The scene starts to play ov eor Sean REM eeu 20079 4 Select the IN point using lt lt gt gt and press ENTER Playback pauses 5 Press ENTER if the IN point is correct If the IN point is incorrect select the IN point using and press ENTER The display for setting the OUT point end of the scene appears 6 Select the OUT point using lt lt gt gt and press ENTER Playback pauses 1 20 7 Press ENTER if the OUT point is correct If the OUT point is incorrect select the OUT point using and press ENTER The selected scene is added to the scene information block To add more scenes go to step 4 8 When you finish adding scenes press The scene list is displayed 10 finish editing the scene list select and press ENTER The display for entering the title name appears To enter a new name select Enter and follow explanations on page 34 Title Name Enter the title name DV 11 10 03 13 30 12 11 03 16 46 Dv EDIT Scene Lis Tea 0 00 22 00036 04032 Total duration of the programme N Total number of scenes 3 Scene information block 9 Select the sce
241. ins two pict sizes the selected size is recorded However if the 16 9 signal cannot be recorded as 16 9 is recorded as 4 3 When playing 16 9 size picture recorded as the image is fixed to 4 3 Letter Box regardless of the setting in TV Type of Video setup page 88 Remnants of images may appear on your screen when using Rec NR Rec Video Equalizer does not affect the input of the DV IN jack and does not work with RGB signals Creating chapters in a title The recorder can automatically divide a recording a title into chapters by inserting chapter marks at approximately 6 minute intervals during recording To disable this function set Auto Chapter in the Recording setup to Off page 93 When recording to the HDD a DVD R VR mode or a DVD RW VR mode you can insert and erase chapter marks manually page 67 Note When dubbing page 71 the chapter marks in the dubbing source are not retained in the dubbed title Using the Quick Timer function You can set the recorder to record in 30 minute increments Press REC repeatedly to set the duration Each press advances the time in 30 minute increments The maximum duration is six hours r 0 30 1 00 5 30 normal recording 6 00 4 The time counter decreases minute by minute to 0 00 then the recorder stops recording the power does not turn off Even if you turn off
242. ion Power supply input Digital 3 3V VSS Digital GND CSYNC Fixed at H HDATA 6 Input output of data 6 HDATA 3 Input output of data 3 HDATA 2 Input output of data 2 AT2DATA 0 Input output of data 0 for HDD driver 2 151 Input output of data 15 for HDD driver AT2DMAREQ Input of request signal from DMA AT2DIOW Output of I O write signal VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V HDATA 4 Input output of data 4 HDATA 1 Input output of data 1 HDATA 0 Input output of data 0 INT 7 Output of interrupt request GPIO AT2DATA 2 Input output of data 2 for HDD driver AT2DATA 13 Input output of data 13 for HDD driver AT2DATA 1 Input output of data 1 for HDD driver AT2DATA 14 Input output of data 14 for HDD driver VSS Digital GND VDD33 Power supply input Digital 3 3V INT 8 Not used DBI Input of SDJ ICE JTAG TRST INT 6 Fixed at H INT 5 Fixed at H AT2DATA 4 Input output of data 4 for HDD driver AT2DATA I1 Input output of data 11 for HDD driver AT2DATA 3 Input output of data 3 for HDD driver AT2DATA 12 Input output of data 12 for HDD driver VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VSS Digital GND INT4 Fixed at H WP INT3
243. l B gt 26 2 BOUT 16V NS 7 0615 1606 0604 MSB709 RT1 RECG 40V RESET RECG 1 1 RECR 4 GND V B amp cTSI R621 B4 100k 680 1 SN74LVO8APWR 0 M amp Rx 2 1 7 4 7 m PSU V 605 Kra 1 9 1 FSW SW BUFFER 4 4 R611 C MORE AU E LC e E 120 gt 13 2 2 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 RERO W R638 XSYSRST 06 907272 ROUT gt RISMSTATUS2 0 m NS R656 W TX 0 0 0605 MSB709 RT1 R639 RISMSTATUS1 SPDIEO r 7 J J TEE SCLK 0 RB602 RTS 0 ARP w 10 4 ITREQ R647 R648 1603 R641 RISMSTATUS2 1 1 0 1 0 470 10uH RECCR 1 Iw ss RX 0 1 R649 1 ceni SCLK 0 lt N 100 XRMUTE 03 W XRMUTE P CONT 4505 A XLMUTE 1 MSB709 RT1 F XLMUTE B BUFFER B i SW5V UNSW4V lean ta UNSW4V i R650 8661 1AV 103 470 0 1 W 1 8 FB603 10402 UNSW3V 9 2800 SW1V 5 FB605 i PAGE 4 5 9 100 1 GND SW3 4V 1 0607 Ly 1 1602 MSB709 RT1 I GND 4 R628 BUFFER P CONT JL603 I 1 EA EEEE aA P C618 C622 C619 6 7 014 C610 1601 20 725 727 920 925 B B EO MP 30D LEZ
244. laced in a very damp room moisture may condense on the lenses inside the recorder Should this occur the recorder may not operate properly In this case if the recorder is on leave it on if it is off leave it off for about an hour until the moisture evaporates When you move the recorder take out any discs If you don t the disc may be damaged On adjusting volume Do not turn up the volume while listening to a section with very low level inputs or no audio signals If you do the speakers may be damaged when a peak level section is played On cleaning Clean the cabinet panel and controls with a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution Do not use any type of abrasive pad scouring powder or solvent such as alcohol or benzine About repairing the hard disk drive It may be necessary to access data stored the hard disk for testing purposes there is no intention to copy or store the data titles or any other information replacement or initialization format is required the hard disk will be formatted at our discretion In this case please note that all of the contents recorded there will be erased including any data found to violate copyright law On cleaning discs disc lens cleaners Do not use a commercially available cleaning disc or disc lens cleaner wet or spray type These may cause the recorder to malfunction Supplied accessories Mains lead 1 Aerial cable 1
245. laylist titles in the Title List Playlist or the original titles in the Title List Original To switch the two Title Lists press while a Title List is displayed To create and edit a Playlist see page 67 3 Press ENTER if point A is correct If point A is incorrect select point A using and press ENTER The display for setting point B appears 4 Select point B using 4 and press ENTER Playback pauses 5 Press ENTER if point B is correct 1f point is incorrect select point using and press ENTER display asks for confirmation To reset point A press RETURN and go to step 2 To reset point B press repeat step 4 preview the title without scenes to be erased select Preview except for DVD RWs 6 Select and press ENTER scene 15 erased The display for setting point appears To continue go to step 2 To finish select Quit 6 Hint A chapter mark is inserted after the scene was erased The chapter mark divides the title into separate chapters on either side of the mark Notes Images or sound may be momentarily interrupted at the point where you erase a section of a title Sections shorter than five seconds may not be erased For DVD RWs the erased section may be slightly different from the points you selected Erasing and Editing a Title HDD Gs This s
246. lect Yes and press ENTER If picture is distorted select No and press ENTER Audio Settings Audio The Audio setup allows you to adjust the sound according to the playback and connection conditions 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode Select SETUP and press ENTER Select Audio and press ENTER The Audio setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined amp AeT Vides Audio Connection slo Aue DRC Suid Recording Downmix Dalby 8 Audio attenuation If the playback sound is distorted set this item to On The recorder reduces the audio output level This function affects the output of the following jacks LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks LINE 1 TV jack LINE 3 DECODER jack On Select this when the playback sound from the speakers is distorted Off Normally select this position Progressive Mode DVD software can be divided into two types film based software and video based software Video based software is derived from TV and displays images at 25 frames 50 fields 30 frames 60 fields per second Film based software is derived from film and displays images at 24 frames per second Some DVD software contains both Video and Film In order for these images to appear natural on your s
247. lideshow of the pictures on the disc begins For DivX video files playback starts from the first DivX video file on the disc the disc contains audio tracks JPEG image files and DivX video files only the DivX video files are played back when D gt is pressed If the disc contains MP3 audio tracks and JPEG image files only the JPEG image files are played back when D gt is pressed To stop playback or slideshow Press To pause playback or slideshow Press M To play the beginning of the MP3 audio track or DivX video file Press OPTIONS to select Play Beginning and press ENTER To fast forward or fast reverse an MP3 audio track or DivX video file Press 4 09 during playback To go to the next or previous MP3 audio track JPEG image file or DivX video file Press 144 gt P during playback If you repeatedly press 64 or PPI you will go to the next or previous album Except JPEG image file To play DivX video file in slow motion one frame at a time Playback direction only Press B gt in pause mode To go to the next or previous album Except for DivX video files Press 4 during playback or slideshow To display the registration code for this recorder Select Registration Code in the Others setup page 96 About playback order of albums tracks and files Albums play in the following order Structure of disc contents Tree 1 Tree2 Tree3 Tree4 Tree
248. lingual programme Note If you set the recording mode to be changed while dubbing from a DVD to the HDD the sound recorded in the source DVD is applied regardless of this setting When you have already registered a password the display for entering the password appears DVD Parental Control Enter your password ce 2 your four digit password using the number buttons then select OK and press ENTER DVD Parental Control 3 Select Standard and press ENTER The selection items for Standard are displayed Parental Cori 4 Selecta geographic area as the playback limitation level and press ENTER The area is selected When you select Others press the number buttons to select and enter an area code in the table page 112 Then select and press ENTER Setting Selects the mode used recording the HDD page 40 Synchro Rec Selects the recording destination used for Synchro Recording page 49 HQ Records in higher quality Recordto Records to the HDD approximate 15 Mbps HDD HQ Records in the standard HQ Recordto Records to DVDs mode DVD DVD Rec Settings Auto Chapter Bilingual Recording for all recordable discs except DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode Selects the sound to be recorded on the recordable disc This setting is not necessary when recording
249. ll not be saved when you switch to another folder Images larger than 720 x 480 will be reduced to 720 x 480 when displayed The following images are not displayed progressive JPEG image files greyscale image files 4 1 1 JPEG image files When you attempt to play a broken file or a file that does not satisfy the play conditions JJ appears but the recorder cannot play the file The recorder cannot play a DivX video file of size more than 720 width x 576 height 4 GB Hints If you add numbers 01 02 03 etc to the front of the track file names when you store the tracks or files in a disc the tracks and files will be played in that order Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start playback it is recommended that you create albums with no more than two trees Notes Depending on the software you use to create the DATA DVD DATA the playback order may differ from the above illustration No more than a total of 999 individual folders can be played Folders that do not contain JPEG MP3 DivX files are counted as well No more than a total of 999 folders and 9999 files can be played Files other than JPEG MP3 DivX files and folders that do not contain JPEG MP3 DivX files are counted as well No more than 999 folders and files can be recognized in a single folder Folders that do not contain JPEG MP3 DivX files are counted as well Proceeding to the next or another album
250. lling and Protecting a Disc You can execute options effective for the entire disc using the Disc Information display 025 OPTIONS Labelling a disc GD 11773 Em 1 inserta disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 27 2 Press OPTIONS to select Disc Information and press ENTER The Disc Information display appears Available settings differ depending on the disc type Example When the inserted disc is a DVD RW mouy Disc Information Cum Finalise Disc Date 1 102006 28 10 2008 3 HSP 0F45M SP THOON LSP 1H 5M LP 2H00M SLP 4H00M Remainder 234768 3 Select Disc Name and press ENTER Enter the disc name in the Input Disc Name display page 34 gt continued 512 36 38 Note You can enter up to 64 characters for a DVD s disc name The disc name may not appear when the disc is played on other DVD equipment Protecting a disc 1 insert a disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 27 2 Press OPTIONS to select Disc Information and press ENTER The Disc Information display appears Available settings differ depending on the disc type Example When the inserted disc is a DVD RW VR mode 7
251. ly input Digital 1 0V 1 Not used TRDATA 3 Not used TRSYNC Not used EVENTIO Not used VDD33 Power supply input Digital 3 4V VRMA Fixed at L VRMB Fixed at L VSSDADIO Analog GND RREFI REXTI Fixed at L REF2 REXT2 Fixed at L VDD33 Power supply input Digital 3 4V VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VSS Digital GND VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VSS Digital GND VDD33 Power supply input Digital 3 4V VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V DADRS 3 Output of address 3 for SDRAM DADRS 10 Output of address 10 for SDRAM VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V DDATA 8 Input output of data 8 for SDRAM VDD25 Power supply input Digital 2 5V DDATA 10 Input output of data 10 for SDRAM DDATA 3 Input output of data 3 for SDRAM 4 Input output of data 4 for SDRAM 4 Not used TRDATA 7 Not used TRST Fixed at L 5 4 VCCAADI0A Function Power supply input Analog 3 3V ADC VROA Fixed at L VROB Fixed at L VCCAADIOB Power supply input Analog 3 3V ADC VCCADAIO Power supply input Analog 3 3V DAC VCCADAIO Power supply input Analog 3 3V DAC VCCADAIO Power su
252. may take some time This recorder supports MP3 audio bit rates up to 320 kbps 1 15 About MP3 audio tracks JPEG image files and DivX video files MP3 is an audio compression technology that satisfies certain ISO MPEG regulations JPEG is an image compression technology You can play MP3 MPEGI Audio Layer 3 format audio tracks and JPEG image files on DATA CDs CD ROMs CD Rs CD RWs or JPEG image files on DATA DVDs DVD ROMs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RWs DVD Rs DATA CDs must be recorded according to 1509660 Level 1 Level 2 or Joliet format for the recorder to recognize the MP3 tracks DivX is a video file compression technology developed by DivX Inc This product is an official DivX Certified product You can play DATA CDs and DATA DVDs that contain DivX video files You can also play discs recorded in MultiSession Border See the instructions supplied with the disc drives and the recording software not supplied for details on the recording format Note on MultiSession Border discs If audio tracks and images in Music CD format or Video CD format are recorded in the first session border only the first session border will be played back Note The recorder may not be able to play some DATA CDs DATA DVDs created in the Packet Write format Erasing and Editing Before Editing This recorder offers various edit options for various disc types Notes You may lose the edited contents if you remove the
253. mber for this recorder and the supplied remote to one that differs from the other Sony DVD recorder or player after you have completed Step 6 Easy Setup The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3 Number buttons 00A e 9 SYSTEM MENU 1 Check that Easy Setup page 20 has been finished If Easy Setup has not been finished first perform Easy Setup 2 Press SYSTEM MENU System Menu appears 3 Select SETUP and press ENTER setup Gey cramerseung Vide Channel Sort Audo _ Guide Page Recording wo OSD E Ores Step 5 Preparing Remote You can control the recorder using the supplied remote Insert two size batteries by matching the and ends on the batteries to the markings inside the battery compartment When using the remote point it at the remote sensor g on the recorder Q Notes If the supplied remote interferes your other Sony DVD recorder or player change the command mode number for this recorder page 18 Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible leakage and corrosion Should leakage occur do not touch the liquid with bare hands Observe the following Do not use a new battery with an old battery or batteries of different manufacturers Do not attempt to recharge the batterie
254. menu displays options applicable only to the selected item The displayed options differ depending upon Notes After pressing REC it may take a short while to start recording You cannot change the recording mode while recording If there is a power failure the programme you are recording may be erased You cannot watch a PAY TV Canal Plus programme while recording another PA Y TV Canal Plus programme To use the TV Direct Rec function you must first correctly set the recorder s clock Checking the disc status while recording You can check the recording information such as recording time or disc type Press DISPLAY during recording The recording information appears Dp 12345 1 2 3 4 Disc type format Recording status Recording mode Recording time Press DISPLA Y to turn off the display To change the title order Sort While the Title List menu is turned on press OPTIONS to select Sort Titles Press t to select the item and press ENTER the model situation and disc type Order Sorted By Date In order of when the titles were recorded The title that is meust 14768 recorded most recently is listed at the top mance By Title In alphabetical order AC Mae Number In order of recorded title N Erase
255. mera before shooting The recorded picture may be momentarily affected or the start and end points of a programme may be different from what you have set if the source DV Digital8 format tape is in any of the following conditions In this case see Recording from connected equipment without a timer page 51 There is a blank space in the recorded portion of the tape The tape s time code is not sequential If the picture size or the recording mode on the tape being dubbed changes DV Dubbing Before DV Dubbing This section explains dubbing with a digital video camera via the DV IN jack on the front panel If you want to dub by way of the LINE IN jacks see Recording from connected equipment without a timer on page 51 The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to the i LINK standard Follow the instructions in Preparing for DV dubbing and then move on to the section on dubbing For more information about i LINK see About i LINK on page 107 Preparing for DV dubbing You can connect a digital video camera to the DV IN jack on the recorder to record or edit from a DV Digital8 format tape Operation is straightforward because the recorder will fast forward and rewind the tape for you you do not need to operate your digital video camera Do the following to start using the DV Edit functions of this recorder See the instruction manual supplied with the digital video camera as
256. moam This label is located laser protective housing inside the enclosure About this manual Check your model name The instructions in this manual are for 4 models 520 RDR HX720 RDR HX722 and RDR HX920 Check your model name by looking at the front panel of the recorder In this manual the internal hard disk drive is written as HDD and disc is used as a general reference for the HDD DVDs or CDs unless otherwise specified by the text or illustrations Icons such as listed at the top of each explanation indicate what kind of media can be used with the function being explained Instructions in this manual describe the controls on the remote You can also use the controls on the recorder if they have the same or similar names as those on the remote illustrations used in this manual may not match the graphics displayed on your TV screen The explanations regarding DVDs in this manual refer to DVDs created on this recorder The explanations do not apply to DVDs that are created on other recorders and played back on this recorder Precautions This unit operates on 220 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Check that the unit s operating voltage is identical with your local power supply To prevent fire or shock hazard do not place objects filled with liquids such as vases on the apparatus Install this system so that the mains lead
257. n 5 Component Video Output B Y Check lt Purpose gt This check confirms that the B Y signal of the component video conforms to the PAL standard If this signal level is not correct color of the video signal will have different color when the COMPONENT connector output signal is connected to a projector Mode PLAY Signal Color bars Test point S VIDEO OUTPUT S C connector terminated in 75Q Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 300 mV 30 mVp p Check method 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the burst signal level is 300 mV 30 mVp p 300 30 mVp p Fig 7 3 4 Component Video Output Y Check Purpose This check confirms that the component Y signal output has the rated amplitude If this signal level is not correct brightness of the video signal will not be too dark or too thin when the COMPONENT connector output signal is connected to a projector having COMPONENT input having COMPONENT input Mode PLAY Signal Color bars Test point D1 D2 VIDEO OUTPUT connector pin terminated in 750 Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 700 mV 50 mVp p Check method 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the burst signal level is 700 mV 50 mVp p 700 50 Fig 7 5 6 Component Video Output Check lt Purpose gt This check confirms that the R Y signal
258. n see the operating instructions supplied with the connected components gt continued 15 16 18 Notes Do not connect your TV s audio output jacks to the LINE IN R AUDIO L jacks at the same time This will cause unwanted noise to come from your TV s speakers With connection do not connect the LINE IN R AUDIO L and LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks to your TV s audio output jacks at the same time This will cause unwanted noise to come from your TV s speakers With connection after you have completed the connection make the appropriate settings under Easy Setup Audio Connection page 20 Otherwise no sound or a loud noise will come from your speakers 1 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories 2 pTS and DTS Digital Out are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc 2 With the TVI C button pressed down enter the TV s manufacturer code using the number buttons For instance to enter 09 press 0 then 9 After you enter the last number release the TV VC button Code numbers of controllable TVs If more than one code number is listed try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your TV Manufacturer Code number Sony 01 default Hitachi 24 33 Panasonic 17 49 Philips 06 08 Samsung 71 Sanyo 25 Thomson 43 Toshiba 38
259. nalising 4 Select Protect and press ENTER Finalising is necessary when playing equipment other To cancel the protection ian this moqo an After finalising you cannot edit or Select Unprotected in step 4 record on the disc If you want to record on it again unfinalise Hint page 38 or reformat the disc You can set protection for individual titles page 38 However if you page 64 reformat the disc all recorded contents will be erased EE Finalising is necessary The disc Unfinalising a disc Gs For DVD RWs Video mode DVD RWs Video mode that have been finalised to prohibit additional recording or editing can be unfinalised to allow further recording or editing For DVD RWs VR mode If you cannot record or edit on a DVD RW VR mode that has been finalised with other DVD equipment unfinalise the disc Note The recorder is not able to unfinalise DVD RWs Video mode that have been finalised on another recorder 1 insert a disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 27 2 Press OPTIONS to select Disc Information and press ENTER The Disc Information display appears 3 Select Unfinalise and press ENTER The recorder starts unfinalising the disc Unfinalising may take several minutes can be played only on equipment that supports DVD R in VR mode After finalising you cannot edit or record on the disc using this recorder 8 Reformatting
260. ne information block you want to edit using 4 gt and press ENTER The sub menu appears Move Changes the scene order using lt gt and ENTER Erase Erases the scene When asked for confirmation select Preview Plays the selected scene To add more scenes press goto step 4 Settings and Adjustments Aerial Reception and Language Settings Basic The Basic setup helps you to make tuner clock and programme position settings for the recorder 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select SETUP and press ENTER 3 Select Basic and press ENTER The options for Basic appear The default settings are underlined To turn off the display press SYSTEM MENU repeatedly 11 Select press ENTER The title name is fixed and the display asks if you want to start recording change the disc media select Media and press AF change the dubbing mode select Dub Mode and press t Data capacity required for the dubbing This is displayed in red when the size exceeds the available space on the dubbing target media DV Dubbing 0 4 668 Change the dubbing mode if necessary Select Start to start dubbing Media ovo Dub Mode SP21GB Quit 12 Select Start and press ENTER The recorder starts recording the tape contents as pro
261. nected equipment The recorder stops recording when the connected equipment turns off To stop recording Press REC STOP gt SYNCHRO REC To cancel Synchro Rec Press gt SYNCHRO REC The SYNCHRO REC indicator on the recorder turns off 50 Check Overlap Checks for overlapped settings The timer setting without the mark has priority over the other settings Overlap The folowing timer setings overlap Timer settings with an overlap indicator next to hem will not be enl rel recorded 2040 2140 DEF Dj Sa 2631 2100 2200 Select Close to return to the Timer List To change or cancel the setting repeat steps 2 and 3 above When the timer settings overlap The programme that starts first has priority and the second programme starts recording only after the first programme has finished 7 00 8 00 9 00 10 00 A will be cut off B When the recordings start at the same time The programme that is set last has priority In this example timer setting B is set after A so the first part of timer setting A will not be recorded 7 00 8 00 9 00 10 00 When the end time of one recording and the start time of another are the same After finishing the previous recording the other recording may be delayed 7 00 9 00 A 10 00 Q Notes
262. nnected and that operations and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment Notes about the discs To keep the disc clean handle the disc by its edge Do not touch the surface Dust fingerprints or scratches on the disc may cause it to malfunction Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sources such as hot air ducts or leave it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may rise considerably inside the car After playing store the disc in its case Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth Wipe the disc from the centre out gt Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner commercially available cleaners or anti static spray intended for vinyl LPs Do not use the following discs disc that has a non standard shape e g card heart disc with a label or sticker on it disc that has cellophane or sticker adhesive on it Note Normally only one piece of equipment can be connected to this recorder by the i LINK cable DV connecting cable When connecting this recorder to i LINK compatible equipment having two or more i LINK jacks DV jacks see the instruction manual of the equipment to be connected About the name i LINK i LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by SONY and is a trademark approved by many corporations IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by t
263. nt to set for a thumbnail picture and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation To change the thumbnail press t Select and press ENTER The scene is set for the title s thumbnail picture 1 7 3 Playing the Recorded Programme Title List HDD EE EN Gum ET To play a recorded title select the title from the Title List HDD FPO 1 TITLE LIST g OPTIONS ers el 1 Press HDD or DvD If you select DVD insert DVD see 1 Inserting a Disc on page 27 Playback starts automatically depending on the disc 2 Press TITLE LIST To show the extended Title List press OPTIONS to select Display List and press ENTER To turn off the Title List Press TITLE LIST Hints After recording the first scene of the recording the title is automatically set as the thumbnail picture You can select TITLE LIST from the System Menu Notes The title names may not appear for DVDs created on other DVD recorders It may take a few seconds for the thumbnail pictures to be displayed After editing the title thumbnail picture may change to the first scene of the recording title After dubbing the title thumbnail picture set on the source recording is cancelled Title List with Thumbnail Images Example DVD RW 12 Tennis 2 1920 oom LSP 99
264. ods to set the timer the standard method and ShowView method Standard Set the date time and programme position of the programme manually ShowView Enter the ShowView programming number designated for each TV programme page 44 Setting the timer manually Standard E TIMER OPTIONS STOP Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the recording modes To select the mode set Setting of the HDD Rec Settings to HQ in the Recording setup page 93 HQ records pictures in higher quality than HQ on the HDD Note that HQ plus appears as HQ in the front panel display and the on screen displays hours HDD Recording mode RDR RDR RDR HX520 720 HX920 HX722 HQ High 8 20 33 quality HQ 1 13 32 53 1 HSP 19 46 77 I hr 30 min SP 26 61 12 2 Standard mode 18 33 77 127 21 30 min 39 93 13 3 53 124 205 4 79 187 308 6 SLP Long 106 249 40 8 duration The recording time for DVD R DL Double Layer discs is as follows 1 hour 48 minutes HSP 2 hours 42 minutes SP 3 hours 37 minutes LSP 4 hours 31 minutes ESP 5 hours 25 minutes LP 7 hours 14 minutes EP 10 hours 51 minutes SLP 14 hours 28 minutes Notes The maximum continuous recording time single title is eight hours Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies with t
265. og GND GOUT PD1 Output of analog video signal green VSSADA10 Analog GND YOUT PD4 Output of analog video signal Y TESTMOD 0 Digital GND TESTMOD 3 Digital GND TESTMOD 4 Digital GND RESET Input of hardware reset signal REC656 0 Input of digital video signal 0 R656CLKI Input of clock signal REC656 3 Input of digital video signal 3 REC656 5 Input of digital video signal 5 REC6561 6 Input of digital video signal 6 DADRS 2 Output of address 2 for SDRAM DADRS 0 Output of address 0 for SDRAM DBA 0 O O O Output of bank address 0 for SDRAM VSS Digital GND DRAS Output of RAS signal for SDRAM DCLKNO Output of negative clock signal DVREF Input of reference voltage ATIDATA 4 Input output of data 4 for DVD 3 Input output of data 3 for DVD ATIDATA 1 Input output of data 1 for DVD ATIDMAREQ Input of request signal from DMA ATIDMACK Input of ACK signal from DMA ATIADR 2 Output of devise address 2 for DVD HDACK 1 Fixed at H Output of output enable signal HCS 2 Output of chip select signal GPIO 2 5 6 HADRS 31 Function Output of address 31 HADRS 27 Output of address 27 HADRS 23 Output of address 23 HA
266. oint appears and the title starts to play return to the beginning of the title press II and then press Ke Divide 1 World Sports 03234 Selecta point 4 Select the dividing point by pressing 4 lt gt and press ENTER Playback pauses 5 Press ENTER if the dividing point is correct If the dividing point is incorrect select the dividing point using and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation To change the dividing point press t 6 Select OK and press ENTER The title is divided in two Hint After a title is divided the title name prior to division is assigned to both the first and second parts 1 16 Set Thumbnail Changes the title s thumbnail picture that appears in the Title List page 30 Make a Playlist Adds the entire title to the Playlist title as one scene page 69 Hints You can erase multiple titles at one time page 65 You can automatically erase titles that have already played page 93 You can label or re label DVDs page 35 Note DVD RW DVD R VR mode playlist titles cannot be protected Erasing multiple titles Erase Titles HDD GD EN E You can select and erase more than one title at one time using the OPTIONS menu 1 Press TITLE LIST For HDD titles or DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode press gt to switch the Title Lists if necessary 2 Press OPTIONS to select Eras
267. oll the list display by page mode Press 4 while the list display is turned on Each time you press 4 the entire Timer List changes to the next previous page of timer settings To turn off the Timer List Press TIMER LIST or 47 RETURN Hint While recording you cannot modify the timer setting for the current recording but you can extend the duration of the recording time page 43 Notes When PDC VPS is set to On for one or more timer recordings the start times may change in the event of a broadcast delay or early start Even if the timer is set timer recordings cannot be made while recording a programme that has priority Even if the timer is set for the same daily or weekly programme the timer recording cannot be made if it overlaps with a programme that has priority will appear next to the overlapped setting in the Timer List Check the priority order of the settings Recording from connected equipment without a timer You can record from a connected VCR or similar device To connect a VCR or similar device see Connecting a VCR or Similar Device on page 21 Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack i LINK jack 1 Press HDD or DvD If you select DVD insert a recordable DVD see 1 Inserting a Disc on page 27 2 Press INPUT SELECT to select an input source according to the connection you made The front p
268. ommand Mode DVDS E Recording Code Dvo Factory Setup Format Euys Dimmer Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display Normal Bright lighting Save Low lighting Turns off the Power lighting when the power is off Power save standby Selects whether this recorder is in power save mode when the power is off standby On Sets to power save mode Normally select this Off Does not set to power save mode Additional Information Troubleshooting If you experience any of the following difficulties while using the recorder use this troubleshooting guide to help remedy the problem before requesting repairs Should any problem persist consult your nearest Sony dealer Power The power does not turn on Check that the mains lead is connected securely Picture There is no picture gt Re connect all connecting cords securely gt The connecting cords are damaged gt Check the connection to your TV page 12 gt Switch the input selector on your TV such as to VCR so that the signal from the recorder appears on the TV screen Check that Scart Setting in the Video setup is set to the appropriate item that conforms to your system page 89 gt If you connect the recorder to your TV via only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks set Component Out in the Video setup to page 88 This recorder cannot record NTSC sign
269. on press ENTER again To cancel all of the selections select Reset Dub Selected Tiles Select tes in the order you want to dub them 2 World Mon 837 3 WoridTour Asia 2 Wed 101 4 World TourAsia 3 Thu 1611 1 Total size of the selected titles This is displayed in red when the size exceeds the available space on the dubbing target media 2 Direction of dubbing 3 Available space on the disc to be dubbed approximate 4 PL Indicates a Playlist title Dubbing restriction You cannot dub movies and other DVD VIDEOS to the HDD Also when dubbing from a DVD to the HDD a grey blank screen will be recorded for scenes that contain a copy protection signal Copy Dubbing protection signals protection HDD Gum signal Em Copy Once HDD gt IT EB CPRM compatible DVD RWs DVD Rs mode only CPRM Content Protection for Recordable Media is a coding technology that protects copyrights for images Move HDD gt Gia Titles containing Copy Once copy protection signals can be moved only from HDD to DVD RW DVD R VR mode after the title is moved the original title in the HDD is erased The Move function is performed using the same procedure as dubbing page 74 Titles containing Copy Once copy protection signals are indicated with 227 Notes
270. on some recordable discs depending on the disc 11 12 14 Hookups and Settings Hooking Up the Recorder Follow steps through 6 to hook up and adjust the settings of the recorder Do not connect the mains lead until you reach Step 4 Connecting the Mains Lead on page 16 Notes See Specifications page 106 for a list of supplied accessories Plug in cords securely to prevent unwanted noise Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not have a SCART or video input jack Be sure to disconnect the mains lead of each component before connecting Step 1 Connecting the Aerial Cable Connect the aerial cable by following the steps below to AERIAL IN DVD recorder 920 Lol 68868 to AERIAL OUT ES Aerial cable supplied EAN Signal flow 1 Disconnect the aerial cable from your TV and connect it to AERIAL IN on the rear panel of the recorder 2 Connect AERIAL OUT of the recorder to the aerial input of your TV using the supplied aerial cable When playing wide screen images Some recorded images may not fit your TV screen To change the picture size see page 88 If you are connecting to a VCR Connect your VCR to the LINE 3 DECODER jack on the recorder page 21 Notes Do not connect more than one
271. on the other side However since the audio material side does not conform to the Compact Disc CD standard playback on this product is not guaranteed Notes Some DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RWs DVD Rs or CD RWs CD Rs cannot be played on this recorder due to the recording quality or physical condition of the disc or the chi teristics of the recording device and authoring software The disc will not play if it has not been correctly finalised For more information see the operating instructions for the recording device Youcannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the same DVD RW To change the disc s format reformat the disc page 38 Note that the disc s contents will be erased after reformatting You cannot shorten the time required for recording even with high speed discs It is recommended that you use discs with Video printed on their packaging You cannot add new recordings to DVD Rs DVD Rs or DVD RWs Video mode that contain recordings made on other DVD equipment In some cases you may not be able to add new recordings to DVD RWSs that contain recordings made on other DVD equipment If you do add a new recording note that this recorder will rewrite the DVD menu You cannot edit recordings on DVD RWs DVD RWs Video mode DVD Rs or DVD Rs that are made on other DVD equipment If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by this recorder the data may be erased You may not be able to record
272. oted pF uuF 50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums All resistors are in ohms 1 4 W Chip resistors 1 10 W un less otherwise specified 10000 1000 Caution when replacing chip parts New parts must be attached after removal of chip Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor be cause it is damaged by the heat All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B unless otherwise noted non flammable resistor e w fusible resistor panel designation A internal component e adjustment for repair Line B Line Circled numbers refer to waveforms Voltages are dc between measurement point Readings are taken with a color bar signals on DVD reference disc Readings are taken with a digital multimeter DC 10MW Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production toler ances Note The components identified by mark A or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified When indicating parts by reference number please include the board name WAVEFORMS AV 103 RD 060 4 3 WAVEFORMS AV 103 BOARD CD x1401 J703 COMPONENT 3 1 30 5 us 2 1 0 Vp p RD 060 BoARD 1 x201 ANNA 1 7 Vp p 40 ns 4 4702 S
273. out the hard disk drive The hard disk has a high storage density which enables long recording durations and quick access to the written data However it can easily be damaged by shock vibration or dust and should be kept away from magnets To avoid losing important data observe the following precautions Do not apply a strong shock to the recorder Do not place the recorder in a location subject to mechanical vibrations or in an unstable location Do not place the recorder on top of a hot surface such as a VCR or amplifier receiver Do not use the recorder in a place subject to extreme changes in temperature temperature gradient less than 10 Do not move the recorder with its mains lead connected Do not disconnect the mains lead while the power is on When disconnecting the mains lead turn off the power and make sure that the hard disk drive is not operating the clock is displayed in the front panel display and all recording or dubbing has stopped Do not move the recorder for one minute after you have unplugged the mains lead 1 1 Do not attempt to replace upgrade the hard disk by yourself as this may result in malfunction If the hard disk drive should malfunction you cannot recover lost data The hard disk drive is only a temporary storage space About repairing the hard disk drive The contents of the hard disk drive may be checked in case of re
274. page 112 using the number buttons Note If you select a language in DVD Menu Subtitle or Audio that is not recorded on the DVD VIDEO one of the recorded languages will be automatically selected Format DVD RW DVD RW only The recorder automatically starts formatting in VR mode or Video mode whichever is selected below when a new unformatted DVD RW is inserted Automatically formats the disc in VR mode Video Automatically formats the disc in Video mode One Touch Dubbing Displays the following options for the One Touch Dub function Finalise Disc for all recordable discs except DVD RW in VR mode Selects whether or not to finalise the disc automatically following One Touch Dubbing page 79 Auto Automatically finalises the disc following One Touch Dubbing Manual Allows you to finalise the disc manually sjuawysnipy pue sumag 93 sjuawysnipy pue sumag 95 Remote Control Settings Factory Settings Others The Others setup allows you to set up other operational settings 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode Select SETUP and press ENTER Select Others and press ENTER The Others setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined sere Deme 3 Vides Power save sandy gt udo C
275. pair inspection during a malfunction or modification However the contents will not be backed up or saved by Sony If the hard disk needs to be formatted or replaced it will be done at the discretion of Sony contents of the hard disk drive will be erased including contents that violate copyright laws n power sources The recorder is not disconnected from the AC power source mains as long as it is connected to the wall outlet even if the recorder itself has been turned off If you are not going to use the recorder for a long time be sure to disconnect the recorder from the wall outlet To disconnect the AC power cord mains lead grasp the plug itself never pull the cord Before disconnecting the AC power cord mains lead check that the recorder s hard disk is not operating recording or dubbing on the front panel display On placement Place the recorder in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent heat build up in the recorder Do not place the recorder on a soft surface such as a rug that might block the ventilation holes Do not place the recorder in confined space such as a bookshelf or similar unit Do not place the recorder in a location near heat sources or in a place subject to direct sunlight excessive dust or shock the recorder in an inclined position It is designed to be operated in a horizontal position only Keep the recorder and discs away from equipm
276. panel of the main unit While the diagnostics is in progress either OK or NG appears on the monitor screen to enable the judgment whether the respective devices or the peripheral are normal or have any abnormality When an abnormality is detected the diagnostics is stopped at that moment and you can select to keep running the diagnostics or to stop it 6 1 Check Item Checking item IC name When NG is displayed as the result of the DEVICE TEST the IC or EEPROM M24C32 WMN6T its peripheral is defective VIDEO DEC TVP5147MIPFP DDR IC 511638 0 3 DDR IC 511638 0 3 All parts are mounted on the RD 060 board For IC301 only AEP3 is used 6 1 6 2 MAIN MENU lt lt MAIN MENU gt gt 1 Version No Screen Transition in the Service Mode lt lt Version No gt gt MODEL MRX1534EC Region Code SYSCON Version Version Drive Version 2 Display Color EUN 3 Total Tme 2 SDD MODE lt RETURN gt MODEL SYSCON Version HDD Serial ID HDD Sony ID 2 A RETURN gt 3 lt gt lt 4 gt lt gt lt 5 gt lt RETURN gt
277. pe continues for more than five minutes One Touch Dubbing ends automatically The recorder records a blank for five minutes before it stops dubbing To stop the blank recording press REC STOP 79 82 Program Edit HDD EU GUT ESSET You can select scenes from a DV Digital8 format tape and then automatically record selected scenes to the HDD or a DVD To use this function do the following Connect your digital video camera and prepare for recording Select and edit the scenes you want to dub Using the recorder s remote control fast forward or rewind the tape to select the scenes At this point the selected scenes are not copied to the disc The recorder only remembers the IN and OUT points of the scenes that you selected for dubbing You can also erase or change the order of the scenes Dub the selected scenes After you have selected the scenes the recorder will fast forward and rewind the tape automatically and record the scenes to the HDD ora DVD chapters are created The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD become a single title When Auto Chapter is set to On in the Recording setup this title is divided into chapters When dubbing to the HDD or a DVD RW DVD R VR mode each shooting session on the tape and each selected scene becomes a chapter on the disc For other discs the recorder divides the title into
278. pply input Analog 3 3V DAC VSS Digital GND 5 5 Fixed at L REC656V Input of vertical synchronization signal REC6560 1 Not used REC6560 3 Not used PXCLK Not used REC6560 7 Not used DADRS 5 O O O 01 10 Output of address 5 for SDRAM VDD25 Power supply input Digital 2 5V I O DADRS 7 Output of address 7 for SDRAM DADRS 9 Output of address 9 for SDRAM DADRS 12 O IO O Output of address 12 for SDRAM VSS Digital GND DDATA 1 Input output of data 1 for SDRAM DDATA 2 Input output of data 2 for SDRAM TRDATA 5 Not used TCK Fixed at L TDO Not used VRPA Fixed at L VRPB Fixed at L VSSAAD10B Analog GND VCCDAD10 Power supply input Digital 3 3V ADC VSSDDA10A Digital GND VDDDDA10 Power supply input Digital 1 0V VSSDDA10B Digital GND TESTMODII Digital GND TESTMOD 6 Digital GND REC656H Input of horizontal synchronization signal REC656 1 Input of digital video signal 1 REC6560 2 Not used REC6560 4 Not used REC656I 7 Input of digital video signal 7 DADRSI4 Output of address 4 for SDRAM DADRS 6 Output of address 6 for SDRAM DADRS 8 O O O Output of address 8 for SDRAM VSS Digital GND
279. programme titles and their start times If the Teletext TV guide has a page which always shows the programmes for the current day this page should be input for all days If you start recording more than three minutes before the programme is scheduled to start the correct label information may not be transferred Note that this function may not work correctly with programmes broadcast from some stations If the broadcast system updates the Teletext information at the moment recording starts the title label may not correspond to the recorded programme In this case you may have to manually enter the correct title page 34 Clock Auto Adjust Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when a programme position in your local area broadcasts a time signal 1 Select Clock in Basi ENTER and press 2 Select Auto Adjust and press ENTER Basie Ado Kd Tir 3 Select On and press w 4 Press repeatedly until the programme position of the station that carries a time signal appears and press ENTER Basic Clock Time If the recorder does not receive a time signal from any station Auto Adjust returns to Off automatically and the menu for setting the clock manually appears on the screen If you set Auto Adjust to On the Auto Clock Set function is activated whenever the recorder is turned off Note The Auto Clock Se
280. quiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead free mark LF indicating the solder contains no lead Caution Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with the lead free mark due to their particular size ar LEAD FREE MARK Unleaded solder has the following characteristics Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40 C higher than ordinary solder Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to about 350 Caution The printed pattern copper foil may peel away if the heated tip is applied for too long so be careful Strong viscosity Unleaded solder is more viscous sticky less prone to flow than ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such as on IC pins etc Usable with ordinary solder It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may also be added to ordinary solder SAFETY CHECK OUT After correcting the original service problem perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer 1 Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly soldered connections Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges 2 Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are pinched or contact high wattage resistors 3 Look for unauthorized replacement parts particularly transistors
281. r Contrast weak 3 0 3 strong Brightness dark 3 0 3 bright Colour light 3 0 3 deep Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust any other items 1 11 3 Press the number buttons to enter the ShowView programming number and press ENTER The date start and stop times programme position recording mode etc setting appear If you make a mistake before pressing ENTER press 9 and re enter the correct number Set the recording date or VIDEO Plus Code PlusCode No 237290091 If you want to change the setting press to select the item and press 14 to change setting If you want to re enter the ShowView programming number select Show View No and press ENTER Then re enter the ShowView programming number 4 Select OK and press ENTER The TIMER REC indicator lights up on the front panel and the recorder is ready to start recording To stop recording during timer recording Press REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording If the timer settings overlap See page 43 To extend the recording duration time while recording See page 43 To confirm change or cancel a timer recording See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings Timer List on page 47 Hint The Rec Mode Adjust function also works with this timer method page 43 Notes If one programme conta
282. r supply input Digital 1 0V VDD33 Power supply input Digital 3 3V VSS Digital GND VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VSS Digital GND VDD33 Power supply input Digital 3 3V VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VSS Digital GND VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VSS Digital GND VDD33 Power supply input Digital 3 3V VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VSS Digital GND VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V VDD33 Power supply input Digital 3 3V HDATA 4 Input output of data 4 HDATA 14 Input output of data 14 HDATA 12 Input output of data 12 HDATA 9 Input output of data 9 8 Input output of data 8 AT2ADR 1 Output of device address 1 for HDD driver AT2ADRIO Output of device address 0 for HDD driver AT2ADR 2 Output of device address 2 for HDD driver AT2CS 0 Output of chip select signal for HDD driver VSS Digital GND VDD Power supply input Digital 1 0V HDATA 11 Input output of data 11 TEST Fixed at GND HDATA 7 Input output of data 7 5 Input output of data 5 AT2DIOR Output of I O read signal AT2IORDY Input of I O ready signal AT2DMACK Output of ACK signal from DMA AT2INTRQ Input of IRQ signal 5 8 VDD33 Funct
283. ranto 1305 Kashmiri 1489 Russian 1581 Vietnamese 1149 Spanish 1307 Kurdish 1491 Kinyarwanda 1587 Volap k 1150 Estonian 1311 Kirghiz 1495 Sanskrit 1613 Wolof 1151 Basque 1313 Latin 1498 Sindhi 1632 Xhosa 1157 Persian 1326 Lingala 1501 Sangho 1665 Yoruba 1165 Finnish 1327 Laothian 1502 Serbo 1684 Chinese 1166 Fiji 1332 Lithuanian Croatian 1697 Zulu 1171 Faroese 1334 Latvian 1503 Singhalese 1174 French Lettish 1505 Slovak 1181 Frisian 1345 Malagasy 1506 Slovenian 1703 Not specified Area Code For details see page 94 Code Area Code Area Code Area Code Area 2044 Argentina 2165 Finland 2362 Mexico 2149 Spain 2047 Australia 2174 France 2376 Netherlands 2499 Sweden 2046 Austria 2109 Germany 2390 New Zealand 2086 Switzerland 2057 Belgium 2248 India 2379 Norway 2528 Thailand 2070 Brazil 2238 Indonesia 2427 Pakistan 2184 United 2079 Canada 2254 Italy 2424 Philippines Kingdom 2090 Chile 2276 Japan 2436 Portugal 2092 China 2304 Korea 2489 Russia 2115 Denmark 2363 Malaysia 2501 Singapore 1 28E RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 SECTION 2 HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 DISASSEMBLY NOTE The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure Set Case block assembly Page 2 2 cover assembly Front panel section HDD DVD drive RD 060 board D C fan Page 2 2 Page 2 3 Page 2 4 Page 2 4 Page 2 6 Page 2 7 21 1 240 FL 159 board Page 2 3
284. rd the language set Bilingual Recording of the DVD Rec Settings in the Recording setup to or Sub before recording page 93 To record both the main and sub sounds record on DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode Any discs other than the HDD or DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode cannot be used for recording both main and sub sounds To record on the HDD set Bilingual Recording of the HDD Rec Settings in the Recording setup to Main Sub page 92 If you have connected an AV amplifier to the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL jack and want to change the audio track for HDD DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode during playback set Dolby Digital of the Audio Connection in the Audio setup to D PCM page 91 Playback The recorder does not play any type of disc except HDD The disc is upside down Insert the disc with the labelled side facing up gt The disc is not correctly inserted gt Moisture has condensed inside the recorder In this case if the recorder is on leave it on if it is off leave it off for about an hour until the moisture evaporates If the disc was recorded on another recorder and was not finalised page 36 the recorder cannot play the disc Recording does not stop after you press m gt Press STOP Timer recording is not complete or did not start from the beginning There was a power failure during recording If the power recovers when there is a
285. recordings may not be made when using the PDC VPS function You cannot extend the recording duration time when PDC VPS is set to On Adjusting the recording picture quality and size You can adjust the recording picture quality and picture size 1 Before recording starts press OPTIONS to select Rec Settings and press ENTER Settings Select the item you want to change Rec Mode sP HDD Picture Size 4 3 DVD Ree Picture Size 4 3 Rec NR 2 Rec Video Equalizer 2 Select the item you want to adjust and press ENTER The adjustment display appears Example Rec NR Rec NR 1 2 n Mode Selects the recording mode for the desired recording time and picture quality For more information see Recording mode on page 40 et to On in the Recording setup Recording TV programmes using the ShowView system The ShowView system is a feature that simplifies setting the timer Just enter the ShowView programming number listed in the TV programme guide The date time and programme position of that programme are set automatically Check that the programme positions are correctly set in Channel Setting in the Basic setup page 83 000 Number buttons 000 lt ott 0 9 e REC STOP 1 Press TIMER Timer Set the recording date or VIDEO Plus
286. rred Press down on the recorder for ten seconds until WELCOME appears in the front panel display If this does not resolve the problem format the recorder s HDD by pressing down the HDD button on the recorder for more than ten seconds until FORMAT appears in the front panel display Note that all the contents recorded on the HDD will be erased If this does not fix the problem contact your nearest Sony dealer ERROR appears in the front panel display gt Check that the vent on the rear of the recorder is not blocked Then immediately disconnect the mains lead Leave the recorder off for a while then re connect the mains lead and press on the recorder Specifications System Laser Semiconductor laser Channel coverage PAL B G D K I VHF E2 to E12 to R12 Italian to H Ireland A to J South Africa 4 to 13 UHF E21 to E69 R21 to R69 B21 to B69 CATV S01 to S05 S1 to S20 HYPER S21 to S41 SECAM L for French RDR HX520 and RDR HX920 models only VHF F2 to F10 UHF F21 to F69 France B to Q HYPER S21 to S41 The above channel coverage merely ensures the channel reception within these ranges It does not guarantee the ability to receive signals in all circumstances For details see Receivable channels page 84 Video reception Frequency synthesizer system Audio reception Split carrier system Aerial out 75 ohm asymmetrical aerial socket Timer
287. s If you do not intend to use the remote for an extended period of time remove the batteries If battery leakage occurs wipe out any liquid inside the battery compartment and insert new batteries Do not expose the remote sensor marked g on the front panel to strong light such as direct sunlight or a lighting apparatus The recorder may not respond to the remote 4 Select Others and press ENTER amp SETUP Video Power save Audo Command Mode DVDS Recording Registration Code DVD Factory Setup Format EssySeup 5 Select Command Mode and press ENTER Format Easy Setup 6 Select a Command Mode DVD1 DVD2 or DVD3 and press ENTER T setthe Command Mode for the remote so it matches the Command Mode for the recorder you set above Follow the steps below to set the Command Mode on the remote Hold down ENTER While holding down ENTER enter the Command Mode code number using the number buttons Command Mode Code number DVDI number button 1 DVD2 number button 2 DVD3 number button 3 8 Hold down both the number and ENTER buttons at the same time for more than three seconds To check the Command Mode for the recorder Press on the recorder when the recorder is turned off The Command Mode for the recorder appears in
288. s TITLE LIST If the Title List Playlist appears press 2 Select the title and press ENTER The sub menu appears 3 Select Make a Playlist and press ENTER The selected title is added to the Title List Playlist The title name is the same as the Original title name To play the Playlist title 1 Press TITLE LIST If the Title List Original appears press 2 Selecta title and press ENTER The sub menu appears 3 select Play and press ENTER Dubbing HDD DVD Before Dubbing HDD GUT LES EJ this section dubbing refers to copying a recorded title on the internal hard disk drive HDD to another disc or vice versa You can select to dub one title at a time Title Dubbing see Dubbing a single title Title Dubbing on page 74 or multiple titles all at once Multiple Title Dubbing see Dubbing multiple titles Dub Selected Titles on page 75 Before you start read the following precautions which are common to both dubbing methods If you want to record from a digital video camera connected to the DV IN jack see DV Dubbing on page 77 To record from equipment connected to the LINE IN jacks see Recording from connected equipment without a timer on page 51 Before you start You cannot record both the main and sub sound on DVD RWs DVD RWs Video mode DVD Rs or DVD Rs Video mode For bilingual programmes set Bilingu
289. s under the state as described above the situation cannot be improved 2 If the tray cannot be ejected while the disc is not inserted Execute the forced ejection Insert a DVD ROM DVD test disc DVD software available on the market or the like on the tray and try to close the tray There are cases that it recovers the trouble 3 Contents of forcedly ejected blank disc media DVD RW R can be damaged There can be a case that initialization is also impossible RDR HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 SECTION 1 GENERAL This section is extracted from instruction manual HX725 HX727 HX920 HX925 RDR HX520 HX720 HX722 HX920 2 672 836 E1 1 WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture To avoid electrical shock do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only The mains lead must be changed only at a qualified service shop CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 A This appliance is classified as CLASS 1 LASER product The CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT MARKING is located on the laser protective housing inside the enclosure CAUTION The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard As the laser beam used in this DVD recorder is harmful to eyes do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only waama HUS
290. select the title or track by entering its number You can also search for scene using the time code Number buttons ENTER OPTIONS 1 Press OPTIONS during playback to select a search method and press ENTER Title Search for DVDs Chapter Search for HDD DVDs Track Search for CDs DATA CDs Search for VIDEO CDs Album Search for DATA DVDs DATA CDs Time Search for HDD DVDs DATA DVDs DATA CDs Searches for a starting point by entering the time code DivX video file only File Search for DATA DVDs DATA CDs The display for entering the number appears 1 14 Playing from the beginning of the programme you are recording Chasing Playback HDD Chasing Playback allows you to view the recorded part of a programme while the recording is being made You do not need to wait until the recording finishes Press OPTIONS while recording to select Chasing Playback and press ENTER Playback starts from the beginning of the programme you are recording When you fast forward to the point that you are recording Chasing Playback returns to normal playback Notes For DVD RWs VR mode this function does not work when recording DVD RW in the HQ HSP recording mode The DVD s picture on your TV screen freezes for a few seconds when you fast forward fast reverse or inst
291. signal SYNC V 2 Fixed at L NC Input of sacrt IC s interpolate signal TU PCONT 1 Output of tuner power supply control signal on AUTO PRESET 1 Output of RF gain control signal PCONT2 Not used VA PCONT Output of power control signal for audio video 4 Fixed H L Input of area detection signal AREAS Fixed at L or H Input of area detection signal AREA6 Fixed at H or L Input of area detection signal FL PCONT Output of FLD grid power on signal PCONT Not used S2SW Detection of line 2 S video signal LED_XRESET Output of reset signal for LED and driver LED_STB Output of strove signal for LED driver FLD_CS Output of FLD driver strove signal KEYO Input of switching signal 0 KEY1 Input of switching signal 1 KEY2 Input of switching signal 2 KEY3 Fixed at H FSW Input of blanking signal for EURO scart TU_AFT_2 Fixed at L 2 Oo O O O O O O O O Fixed at L AVSS Analog GND 5 2 1 Function Input of tuner gain signal VREF Power supply input Analog 5V AVCC Power supply input Analog 5V TEST3_CONT Not used START Input of os
292. t function does not work while the recorder is standing by for Synchro Recording To set the clock manually If the Auto Clock Set function did not set the clock correctly for your local area try another station for the Auto Clock Set function or set the clock manually 1 Select Clock in Basic and press ENTER 2 Select Auto Adjust and press ENTER s 1 Of 1 Present Time SU 1 12008 000 3 Select Off and press ENTER 4 Select Present Time and press ENTER Basic Clock Present Time Set the time and date manualy 1 706 000 5 Press 4 4 to set the day and press Set the month year hour and minutes in sequence Press to select the item to be set then press to set the numbers The day of the week is set automatically To change the numbers press to return to the item to be changed and press 6 Press ENTER to start the clock OSD On Screen Display Switches the display language on the screen sjuawysnipy pue 87 Video Settings Video Video settings will adjust items related to the image such as size and colour Choose the settings according to the type of TV tuner or decoder connected to the DVD recorder 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode Select SETUP and press ENTER Select Video and press ENTER The Video setup appe
293. t is fully wired 21 pins Sound There is no sound gt Re connect all connections securely The connecting cord is damaged gt The input source setting on the amplifier or the connection to the amplifier is incorrect The recorder is in reverse play fast forward slow motion or pause mode gt If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL jack check the Audio Connection settings in the Audio setup page 90 The recorder supports only MP3 audio and MPEG audio for DivX video files Press AUDIO and select MP3 audio or MPEG audio Sound distortion occurs gt Set Audio ATT in the Audio setup to page 90 Sound is noisy gt When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks noise will come from the LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks LINE 1 TV jack LINE 3 DECODER jack page 55 The sound volume is low gt The sound volume is low on some DVDs The sound volume may improve if you set Audio DRC in the Audio setup to TV Mode page 92 Set Audio ATT in the Audio setup to Off page 90 gt QQ An alternate audio track cannot be recorded or played When recording from connected equipment set Line Audio Input in OPTIONS menu to Bilingual page 51 Multilingual tracks main and sub cannot be recorded on DVD RWs DVD RWs Video mode DVD Rs or DVD Rs Video mode To reco
294. t it by selecting Parental Control of Factory Setup in the Others setup page 96 When you play discs which do not have the Parental Control function playback cannot be limited on this recorder Depending on the disc you may be asked to change the Parental Control level while playing the disc In this case enter your password then change the level Language DVD VIDEO only DVD Menu Switches the language for the DVD menu Audio Switches the language of the sound track When you select Original the language given priority in the disc is selected Subtitle Switches the language of the subtitles recorded on the disc When you select Audio Follow the subtitle language changes according to the language you selected for the sound track Selects whether to automatically divide a recording a title into chapters during recording or dubbing On Inserts chapter marks at approximately 6 minute intervals Off No chapter mark is inserted Notes The actual chapter mark interval may vary depending on the amount of information contained in the video to be recorded Chapter marks are automatically inserted where the recordings start on the tape when Auto Chapter is set to On during DV dubbing to the HDD or a DVD RW DVD R VR mode Hint If you select Others in DVD Menu Subtitle or Audio select and enter a language code from Language Code List on
295. t signal Dolby Digital HDD DVDs only Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal D PCM Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component lacking a built in Dolby Digital decoder The surround effects of output signals are determined by the Downmix setting item in the Audio setup Dolby Select this when the recorder Digital is connected to an audio component with a built in Dolby Digital decoder On Normally select this Selects the sampling frequency of the audio position signal Off The influence of the 48kHz The audio signals of DVD 16bit VIDEOs are converted to 48 kHz 16 bit and output 96kHz All signals containing 24bit 96 kHz 24 bit are output without conversion However the signals are output at 48 kHz 16 bit if copyright protected signals are contained Note 8kHz 96kHz PCM setting has no effect when audio signals are output from the LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks or LINE 1 TV LINE 3 DECODER jack If the sampling frequency is 96kHz signals are simply converted to analogue signals and output Sjueunsn py pue gt continued 01 92 94 Audio Dynamic Range Control DVDs only Selects the dynamic range difference between soft and loud sounds setting when playing a DVD that conforms to Audio DRC This affects the output from the following jacks LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks LINE 1
296. the Audio Cords on page 15 Select Dolby Digital MPEG DTS and 48kHz 96kHz PCM after setting Digital Out to If you connect a component that does not accept the selected audio signal a loud noise or no sound will come out from the speakers and may affect your ears or cause speaker damage 1 Select Audio Connection in Audio and press ENTER Audio Audio Connection Notes If your TV does not accept S video or RGB signals no picture appears on the TV screen even if you select S Video or RGB See the instructions supplied with your TV You cannot select RGB when Component above is set to On SMARTLINK is available only when Video is selected Line3 Input Selects a method of inputting video signals for the LINE 3 DECODER jack The picture will not be clear if this setting does not match the type of video input signal Video Inputs video signals or RGB RGB signals Decoder Select this when connecting to a PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder If you connect to a cable box satellite receiver such as CanalSat do not select this option S Video Inputs S video signals Note Input signals are recorded in video mode when Video RGB is selected only French RDR 520 and RDR HX920 models can record video or RGB Line3 Output Selects a method of outputting video si
297. the Video Cords Select one of the following patterns through 6 according to the input jack on your TV monitor projector or AV amplifier receiver This will enable you to view pictures o not supplied TV projector or AV amplifier receiver to LINE 2 OUT VIDEO Audio video cord pue sdnyooy TV SCART cord not supplied to G LINE 1 TV to LINE 2 OUT S VIDEO gt DVD recorder to COMPONENT green INPUT marna VIDEO OUT S VIDEO blue BI Component red video cord S video cord TV projector or AV not supplied amplifier receiver Signal flow SCART input jack When you set Easy Setup Linel Output to S Video or RGB page 20 use a SCART cord that conforms to the selected signal Q Video input jack You will enjoy standard quality images Q S VIDEO input jack You will enjoy high quality images not supplied TV projector or AV amplifier receiver Component video input jacks Y You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction and high quality images If your TV accepts progressive 525p 625p format signals you must use this connection and set Component Out in the Video setup to On page 88 Then set Progressive Output of the Video Output to On in the Video setup to send progressive video signals For
298. the front panel display Controlling TVs with the remote You can adjust the remote s signal to control your TV Notes Depending on the connected unit you may not be able to control your TV with some or all of the buttons below If you enter a new code number the code number previously entered will be erased When you replace the batteries of the remote the code number may be reset to the default setting Set the appropriate code number again Number buttons Tv PROG 1 Hold down the TV button located at the bottom of the remote Do not press the V button at the top of the remote continued If the Command Mode for the recorder has not been changed set the Command Mode for the remote to the default setting of DVD3 If the Command Mode for the remote is changed to DVDI or DVD2 you will be unable to operate this recorder Changing programme positions of the recorder using the remote You can change programme positions of the recorder using the number buttons Number buttons ee 06 6060 ee ENTER Example for channel 50 Press 5 0 then press ENTER pue 17 pue sdnyooq 19 20 22 Step 6 Easy Setup Make the basic adjustments by following the on screen instructions in Easy Setup e v5 etp ENTER 1 Turn recorder and your Then switch the
299. the set METAL OXIDE Metal Oxide film resistor The components identified by mark or XX X mean standardized parts so they may F nonflammable have some difference from the original one COILS Items marked not stocked since they uH are seldom required for routine service Some SEMICONDUCTORS delay should be anticipated when ordering these In each case u p for example items uA UPA UPA CAPACITORS UPB UPB UPC uF uPD UPD Ref Part No Description Remarks Ref No No Description Remarks Not supplied _ 103 BOARD COMPLETE C326 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220 590 50V Ak OR E Rok Roe 0327 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220 590 50V C337 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 10 16V lt CAPACITOR gt C401 1 126 947 11 ELECT 47uF 20 35V C405 1 115 339 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 C105 1 109 982 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 C407 1 126 964 11 ELECT 10uF 20 50V C106 1 137 710 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20 6 3V C408 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 0409 1 115 339 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 10 50 6114 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 C410 1 126 964 11 ELECT 10uF 20 50 6117 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5 50V C414 1 126 947 11 ELECT 4TuF 20 35V C118 1 162 970 11 CERAMIC CHIP
300. timer recording the recorder resumes recording Should the power failure continue for more than 1 hour reset the clock page 87 gt Other timer setting overlapped the timer setting page 48 gt Disc space was not enough The PDC VPS function is working Contents previously recorded were erased gt Data that is not playable on this recorder but was recorded on a DVD with a PC will be erased from the disc when the disc is inserted Auto Title Erase of the Timer Settings in the Recording setup is set to page 93 The PDC VPS function does not operate gt Check that the clock and date are set correctly gt Check that the PDC VPS time you set is the correct one there might be a mistake in the TV programme guide If the broadcast you wanted to record did not send the good PDC VPS information the recorder will not start recording Ifthe reception is poor the PDC VPS signal might be altered and the recorder might not start recording gt PDC VPS Scan Off is selected page 43 The recorder does not start playback from the beginning gt Resume play was activated page 53 gt You have inserted a DVD whose Title menu or DVD menu automatically appears on the TV screen when it is first inserted Use the menu to start playback The recorder starts playing automatically gt The DVD VIDEO features an auto playback function Playback stops automat
301. timer recording times Note that when PDC VPS is set to On you cannot make the Extend Time setting If you make a mistake select the item and change the setting 1 10 Recording stereo and hilingual programmes The recorder automatically receives and records stereo and bilingual programmes based on the ZWEITON system or the NICAM system The HDD and a DVD RW VR mode or DVD R VR mode record both main and sub sounds You can switch between main and sub when playing the disc For the HDD you can select the sound track before recording Select Main Sub or Main Sub in Bilingual Recording of the HDD Rec Settings in the Recording setup page 92 A DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R or DVD R Video mode can record only one sound track main or sub at time Select the sound track using the Setup Display before recording starts Set Bilingual Recording of the DVD Rec Settings to Main default or Sub in the Recording setup page 93 ZWEITON German stereo system When a stereo based programme is received Stereo appears When bilingual ZWEITON based programme is received Sub or Main Sub appears NICAM system When a stereo or bilingual NICAM based programme is received NICAM appears in the front panel display To record a NICAM programme be sure to set Audio of Channel Setting in the Basic setup to NICAM default If t
302. tions that do not fit Colour System Selects the colour system when playing VIDEO CDs including Super VIDEO CDs DivX video files PAL Plays a disc in PAL colour system NTSC Plays a disc in NTSC colour system Auto Display On Automatically displays information on the screen when the recorder is turned etc Off Displays information only when DISPLAY is pressed Screen Saver The screen saver image appears when you do not use the recorder for more than 10 minutes while an on screen display such as the System Menu is displayed on your TV screen The screen saver image helps prevent your display device from becoming damaged ghosting On Turns on the screen saver function Off Turns off the function cannot set Component Out to On When you connect the recorder to a monitor or projector via only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks do not select Off If you select Off in this case the picture may not appear Progressive Output If your TV accepts progressive 525p 625p format signals set Progressive Output to On You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction and high quality images 1 Select Progressive Output and press ENTER 2 Select On and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation 3 Select Start and press ENTER The video switches to a progressive signal for 5 seconds 4 signal appears OK se
303. tting on page 83 Disconnect the mains lead from the mains and connect it again PDC VPS Scan Off was selected in the OPTIONS menu page 43 The programme contains copy protection signals that restrict copying Other timer setting overlapped the timer setting page 48 There is no DVD inside the recorder There is not enough disc space for the recording The recorder was in the process of dubbing HDD lt DVD The recorder was in the process of DV Dubbing 44 Recording does stop immediately after you press REC STOP gt It will take few seconds for the recorder to input disc data before recording can stop jeuonippy gt continued 101 Others The recorder does not operate properly gt Restart the recorder Press down on the recorder for more than ten seconds until WELCOME appears in the front panel display When static electricity etc causes the recorder to operate abnormally turn off the recorder and wait until the clock appears in the front panel display Then unplug the recorder and after leaving it off for a while plug it in again Five numbers or letters are displayed in the front panel display gt The self diagnosis function was activated see the table on page 104 The disc tray does not open after you press open close gt It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open aft
304. type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time When you connect the recorder to your TV via the SCART jacks the TV s input source is set to the recorder automatically when you start playback If necessary press TV to return the input to the TV For correct SMARTLINK connection you will need a SCART cord that has the full 21 pins Refer to your TV s instruction manual as well for this connection If you connect this recorder to a TV with SMARTLINK set Easy Setup Linel Output to Video About the SMARTLINK features for SCART connections only If the connected TV or other connected equipment such as a set top box complies with SMARTLINK NexTView Link 7 MEGALOGIC EASYLINK 2 CINEMALINK Q Link EURO VIEW LINK or T V LINK you can enjoy the following SMARTLINK features Preset Download You can download the tuner preset data from your TV to this recorder and tune the recorder according to that data in Easy Setup This greatly simplifies the Easy Setup procedure Be careful not to disconnect the cables or exit the Easy Setup function during this procedure page 20 Direct Rec You can easily record what you are watching on your TV page 28 One Touch Play You can turn on the recorder and TV set the TV s input to the recorder and start playback with one touch of the D gt play button page 53 One Touch Menu You can turn on the
305. u lt lt x x 2885 8868 656 Teg 8303 og amp amp gd E 2 5 FREC656V REC656V C RECB gt W 1 VB 8 5 C6 GPIO RED SDA 0 RECG icu C7 GPIO GREEN SDCLI0 RECR 6308 P C8 GPIO BLUE 100p B C323 CH1 A33GND FSW H H C9 GPI0 FS0 B CH1_A33VDD DGND 100p C318 CH2_A33VDD C336 cH2_A33GND odu 22 5j B AN VI 2A W II 9 _2 IC301 656110 D R305 0319 e 2 Lin 22 Eu VI 2C V DEC vi M REC656I 1 100 0324 2 CH2_A18GND IC301 B REC656I 2 B 0 1 TVP5146M2PFP Y4 ewe B CH2 A18VDD oc 2A 1 e IOGND A18VDD_REF C337 e 0325 2 A18GND REF ogu 656 He 100p cazo B CH3_A18VDD REC656I 4 CH3_A18GND REC656I 5 E W gt VI Mo 656 6 mun VI_3B 8302 656 7 pe c 22 Ou 7 memes 1 0326 CH3 C338 0 1 CH3_A33VDD oau 8 8 lt gt g 2585 o8 2 8 85 95884 C322 a 0 1 REC656CLKI B VDEC3 3V gt 1303 10uH 1301 10uH 53 41 16302 C301 303 C305 10 10 10 G B B 1 8V REG 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V GND 5 12302 BH18MA3WHFV TR XSYSRST gt 100727 C339 LJH 9019 B j 1305 HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 HX727 AEP3 HX920 ARP
306. u want to change BNR MNR Sharpness PB Video Equalizer To lock the disc tray Child Lock You can lock the disc tray to prevent children from ejecting the disc When the recorder is turned on hold down 8 until LOCKED appears in the front panel display 2 open close button does not work while the Child Lock is set To unlock the disc tray hold down until UNLOCKED appears in the front panel display when the recorder is turned on One Touch Play Tf you use the SMARTLINK connection you can easily start playing Press D gt The recorder and your TV automatically turn on and the TV s input is switched to the recorder Playback starts automatically One Touch Menu Tf you use the SMARTLINK connection you can easily display the Title List Press TITLE LIST The recorder and your TV automatically turn on and the TV s input is switched to the recorder The Title List appears Hints You can also use the D gt button in step 3 page 52 to start playback Even if you select Factory Setup in the Others setup page 96 the Child Lock remains set gt 53 2 Select and press ENTER adjustment display appears frame noise reduction Reduces noise contained in the luminance element of the video signal block noise reduction Reduces block noise or mosaic like patterns in t
307. ultaneous Rec and Play function does not work when you record 1 DVD RW in the HQ or HSP recording mode Picture noise may appear depending upon the condition of the recording or when playing a title recorded in the HQ or HSP recording mode The picture freezes for a few seconds when you use fast forward fast reverse or instant replay advance yoeqheld You can also play a DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD Super VIDEO CD CD DATA DVD or DATA CD while recording on the HDD Example Play another title on the HDD while recording to the HDD 1 While recording press TITLE LIST to display the HDD Title List 2 Select the title you want to play and press ENTER 3 Select Play from the sub menu and press ENTER Playback starts from the selected title continued 57 Playing MP3 Audio Tracks JPEG Image Files or DivX Video Files DATA CD You can play MP3 audio tracks JPEG image files and DivX video files on DATA CDs CD ROMs CD Rs CD RWs or JPEG image files and DivX video files on DATA DVDs DVD ROMs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RWs DVD Rs 14 AUDIO DISPLAY e OPTIONS M4 oue r 4 e G9 o mr T 17 9 TEXT 1 inserta disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 27 gt 50 60 62 2 Press gt For MP3 discs playback starts from the first MP3 audio track on the disc For JPEG files a s
308. unswav 10 VIN UNSW 8V TU PCONT 1 1 1301 PCONT PCONT 1 1 a IC1401 IC302 IC202 203 1 IC101 EURO MSP AUDIO AMP AUDIO AMP I 3 3V REG mar I dw wd 16103 IC105 SWsv Mii SW5V S L1401 i HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 i 1 oN RISM3 1106 UNSW4V UNSWI2V A SWA12V 4 t i 1 512Mbit DDRAM 1 102 101102 161103 IC108 swiv 3 3V REG T IRCONTROL COMPARATOR INREG 1 1 UNSW BV A SWA 8V 1 Te 3 55 8 vi vour T N i VA PCONT 1 CONT PCONT 1 a 3 1102 T gt 7 i HX520 AEP3 HX725 AEP3 IC109 HX727 AEP3 HX920 HX925 IC303 1 3 3V REG 1 TU5V REG 1 1 10603 L w vour 1 107 5 IN our SWAY 4 CONTROL CONT 1 3 FAN REG on 605 10606 10604 FAN T 8 REAL TIME RESET EEPROM pd OU j 1 CLOCK 12 Ea 2 5 a 10104 UNSV ron CHECK es pose Ree Ei Seeing c 3 T TU5V REG Q601 0605 0606 607 HX520 AEP3 HX725 VIDEO BUFFER BUFFER HX727 920 925 UNSWSV I 5 FR SIRCS 5V CN604 i t FANHI 2 vec 4 4 a 1603 FAN DET 601 aj cai cri
309. ure to set Colour System to PAL in the Video setup page 90 58 Pausing a TV Broadcast TV Pause You can pause a current TV broadcast and then continue watching the programme at a later time This is useful when you receive an unexpected phone call or visitor while watching TV 1 While viewing a TV broadcast with this recorder press II The picture pauses You can pause the picture for up to three hours aco 1 D Main TV pause 2 Press II or C gt again to resume watching the programme Notes aused titles are not saved to the HDD unction is cancelled when stop is pressed PROG is pr DVD is pressed amp open close is pressed TITLE LIST is pressed INPUT SELECT is pressed the recorder is turned off a timer recording or Synchro Recording is started the PDC VPS function is On and channel scan is started DV dubbing or regular dubbing is started t may take one minute or more to resume playback of the paused programme Evenif you fast forward the recorded programme there will always be a time difference of about one minute or more between the recorded programme and the current TV broadcast d Searching for a Title Chapter Track etc HDD EXIT ES ET 73 19 You search disc title chapter scene or track As titles and tracks are assigned individual numbers
310. us channels For details see page 25 Audio Select NICAM or Standard NICAM Normally select this Standard Select his if the sound from NICAM broadcasts is not clear 3 Press A until the selected programme position row moves to the desired programme position selected programme position is inserted at the new programme position Basic Crane Sor 4 Press ENTER to confirm the setting 5 To change the programme position of another station repeat from step 2 Auto Programme Title Labelling TV Guide Page Some broadcast systems provide a Teletext service in which complete programmes and their data title date programme position recording start time etc are stored day by day A TV guide page corresponds to each day of the week When recording a programme the recorder automatically takes the programme name from the Teletext pages and stores it as the title name The TV guide page numbers depend entirely on the broadcast itself and may be subject to change If so you may have to set those TV guide page numbers manually in the TV Guide Page menu Not available in some areas 1 Select TV Guide Page in Basic and press ENTER The TV Guide Page menu appears AFT Tuning the French CATV channels
311. view the hidden timer settings press 1 4 2 Select the timer setting you want 10 check change cancel and press ENTER sub menu appears 3 Select one of the options and press ENTER Modify Changes the timer setting Select an item using and adjust using Select OK and press ENTER Modiy the tine satino Day and Tine Wed 612 10 00 11 30 Mode Mesa pocwrs 39 00 Erases timer setting Select and press ENTER Erase Are you sure you want to erase this timer setting Mon Sat 22 00 22 15 48 3 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select L3 4 Select the desired audio signal when recording a bilingual programme to the HDD or DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode Press OPTIONS to select Line Audio Input and press ENTER Then select Bilingual and press ENTER For details about bilingual recording see page 41 5 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode For details about the recording mode see page 40 6 Set the timer on the connected equipment to the time of the programme you want to record and turn it off 7 Press SYNCHRO REC The SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on the front panel The recorder is ready to start Synchro Recording The recorder automatically starts recording when it receives an input signal from the con
312. views are not supplied Color Indication of Appearance Parts Example KNOB BALANCE 55 x Cabinet s Color Parts Color 10 The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified Chasiss setion Remarks SONY BADGE 5 A SILVER SONY BADGE 5 BLACK CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FLR 007 COVER ASSY TRAY ASSY WINDOW TRAY HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 ASSY WINDOW TRAY HX920 HX925 SCREW TAPPING BLACK SCREW TAPPING SILVER CASE BLOCK ASSY SILVER SERVICE USE CASE BLOCK ASSY BLACK SERVICE USE REMOTE COMMANDER RMT D231P HX525 HX725 HX727 HX925 REMOTE COMMANDER RMT D230P HX520 HX720 HX722 HX920 Ref No Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description 1 2 658 528 21 WINDOW R 4 3 066 225 11 HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 4 3 066 225 01 1 2 658 528 41 WINDOW R HX920 HX925 5 3 077 331 01 3 3 CR 2 2 658 529 01 WINDOW L 920 925 6 1 831 413 11 2 2 658 529 21 WINDOW L 7 X 2108 963 1 HX520 HX525 HX720 HX722 HX725 HX727 3 X 2108 947 1 PANEL ASSY FRONT BLACK HX725 8 X 2108 958 1 3 X 2108 948 1 PANEL ASSY FRONT SILVER 720 8 X 2108 959 1 3 X 2108 949 1 PANEL ASSY FRONT SILVER HX525 9 3 070 883 31 3 2108 950 1 PANEL ASSY FRONT SILVER HX725 UK 9 3 070 883 41 3 X 2108 951 1 PANEL ASSY FRONT SILVER HX520 AEP 10 A 1176 2

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

France-Chamalières: Chariots de manutention  LIVRET UTILISATEUR - Assistance Orange  Samsung SGH-X210 User Manual  AKG Acoustics C 12VR User's Manual    Samsung YP-300 User's Manual  Reciprocating saw FTS-710  VN - VNP - Oli Vibrators  Morphy Richards 73383 User's Manual  HZL - 12Z  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file